1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Tekelec Manuals
  4. Gateway
  5. IP7 Secure Gateway
  6. Administration manual

Tekelec IP7 Secure Gateway Administration Manual

Ip7 secure gateway
Hide thumbs
1
Table Of Contents
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
Tekelec EAGLE
5
Release 44.0
Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure
Gateway
910-6278-001 Revision A
January 2012
Copyright 2012 Tekelec. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
Legal Information can be accessed from the Main Menu of the optical disc or on the
Tekelec Customer Support web site in the Legal Information folder of the Product Support tab.

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the IP7 Secure Gateway and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Tekelec IP7 Secure Gateway

  • Page 1 Copyright 2012 Tekelec. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA. Legal Information can be accessed from the Main Menu of the optical disc or on the Tekelec Customer Support web site in the Legal Information folder of the Product Support tab.

  • Page 2: Table Of Contents

    Documentation Availability, Packaging, and Updates.............17 Locate Product Documentation on the Customer Support Site........18 Maintenance and Administration Subsystem..............18 EAGLE 5 ISS Database Partitions..................20 Chapter 2: IP7 Secure Gateway Overview........24 Introduction..........................25 Hardware, Applications, and Functions................25 IP Connections.........................26 Point-to-Point Connectivity (IPLIM or IPLIMI Application)...........37 Point-to-Multipoint Connectivity (SS7IPGW and IPGWI)..........38...
  • Page 3 Activating the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Feature.........148 Removing IETF M2PA Components..................156 Removing an IPLIMx Card....................156 Removing an IPLIMx Signaling Link.................159 Removing an IP Host Assigned to an IPLIMx Card............169 Removing an IP Route......................172 Removing an M2PA Association..................176 Changing IETF M2PA Components...................178 Changing the Attributes of an M2PA Association............179 Changing the Buffer Size of a M2PA Association............193 Changing the Host Values of a M2PA Association............204...
  • Page 4 Removing an IP Host Assigned to an IPGWx Card............480 Removing an IP Route......................483 Removing a M3UA or SUA Association................486 Removing an Association from an Application Server...........490 Removing a Routing Key Containing an Application Server.........497 Removing a Network Appearance..................506 Changing IETF M3UA and SUA Components..............508 Changing IP Options......................508 Changing the Attributes of a M3UA or SUA Association..........512 Changing the Buffer Size of a M3UA or SUA Association..........530...
  • Page 5 Adding an IPSG M3UA Signaling Link................771 Adding a Network Appearance..................795 Activating the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Feature.........801 Removing IPSG Components....................809 Removing an IPSG Card......................809 Removing an IPSG Linkset....................812 Removing an IP Host Assigned to an IPSG Card.............826 Removing an IP Route......................831 Removing an IPSG Association...................834 Removing an IPSG M2PA Signaling Link.................840 Removing an IPSG M3UA Signaling Link................848...
  • Page 6 List of Figures Figure 1: EAGLE 5 ISS Database Partitions (Legacy Control Cards)..........21 Figure 2: EAGLE 5 ISS Database Partitions (E5-Based Control Cards)........22 Figure 3: SCTP Association Database Relationships..............27 Figure 4: IP Connections using an EDCM or E5-ENET Card running the IPGWx Applications...........................29 Figure 5: Typical SCTP Association Configuration................30 Figure 6: IP Connections using SSEDCMs running the IPLIMx Applications......30...
  • Page 7 Figure 35: Changing the Attributes of an M2PA Association............189 Figure 36: Changing the Buffer Size of an M2PA Association...........200 Figure 37: Changing the Host Values of a M2PA Association...........214 Figure 38: Changing the Link Value of a M2PA Association to another Link Value on the Same IPLIMx Card........................226 Figure 39: Configuring the SCTP Retransmission Control for a M2PA Association....236 Figure 40: Changing an M2PA Timer Set..................243...
  • Page 8 Figure 74: Changing the CIC Values in an Existing Routing Key Containing an Application Server........................579 Figure 75: Changing the Routing Context Value in an Existing Routing Key......586 Figure 76: Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for M3UA and SUA Associations..........................604 Figure 77: Changing a UA Parameter Set..................619 Figure 78: Turning the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Feature Off........622 Figure 79: An EAGLE 5 ISS with End Office Support and VXI Node........628...
  • Page 9 Figure 113: Configuring IP Options....................872 Figure 114: Configuring IPSG M3UA Linkset Options...............877 Figure 115: Changing an IPSG M2PA Linkset................890 Figure 116: Changing an IPSG M3UA Linkset................911 Figure 117: Changing the Attributes of an IPSG Association.............932 Figure 118: Changing the Buffer Size of an IPSG Association............946 Figure 119: Changing the Host Values of an IPSG Association..........963 Figure 120: Configuring an IPSG Association for SCTP Retransmission Control....976 Figure 121: Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for IPSG M2PA...
  • Page 10 List of Tables Table 1: Admonishments........................14 Table 2: Ethernet Interface and Signaling Link Combinations.............28 Table 3: Uni-Homed and Multi-Homed Node Combinations.............32 Table 4: SS7 Full Routing Keys per IPGWx Functionality............41 Table 5: Example SS7 Routing Key Table..................42 Table 6: Routing Key Lookup Hierarchy..................43 Table 7: SNMP Object Groups......................45 Table 8: Deviations from SNMP Protocols..................46 Table 9: Nodes and Point Codes in Complex Network Example..........49...
  • Page 11 Table 37: Examples of IPGWx Card Provisioning Limits............542 Table 38: Service Indicator Text String Values................571 Table 39: Routing Key Parameter Combinations for Changing the Range of CIC Values in an Existing Routing Key .......................572 Table 40: Routing Key Parameter Combinations for Splitting the Range of CIC Values in an Existing Routing Key......................574 Table 41: Service Indicator Text String Values................581 Table 42: Valid PVALUE Parameter Values if PARM=1.............609...

  • Page 12: Chapter 1: Introduction

    Chapter Introduction Topics: Chapter 1, Introduction, contains general information about the database and the organization Overview..13 of this manual. Scope and Audience..13 Manual Organization..13 Documentation Admonishments..14 Customer Care Center..14 Emergency Response..17 Related Publications..17 Documentation Availability, Packaging, and Updates..17 Locate Product Documentation on the Customer Support Site..18 Maintenance and Administration Subsystem..18 EAGLE 5 ISS Database Partitions..20...

  • Page 13: Overview

    The Database Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway describes the procedures used to configure the EAGLE 5 ISS and it's the database to implement the IP7 Secure Gateway functionality. Note: To view in which state the system’s database is, display the GeoDatabaseState entity, part of the Database entity.

  • Page 14: Documentation Admonishments

    (This icon and text indicate the possibility of service interruption.) Customer Care Center The Tekelec Customer Care Center is your initial point of contact for all product support needs. A representative takes your call or email, creates a Customer Service Request (CSR) and directs your requests to the Tekelec Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
  • Page 15 A primary Technical Engineer is assigned to work on the CSR and provide a solution to the problem. The CSR is closed when the problem is resolved. Tekelec Technical Assistance Centers are located around the globe in the following locations: Tekelec - Global Email (All Regions): support@tekelec.com...
  • Page 16 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure Introduction Gateway Phone: 001-888-367-8552 Peru Phone: 0800-53-087 Puerto Rico Phone: 1-888-367-8552 (1-888-FOR-TKLC) Venezuela Phone: 0800-176-6497 Europe, Middle East, and Africa Regional Office Hours: 8:30 a.m. through 5:00 p.m. (GMT), Monday through Friday, excluding holidays Signaling Phone: +44 1784 467 804 (within UK)

  • Page 17: Emergency Response

    Documentation Bulletins announce a new or updated release. The Tekelec EAGLE 5 ISS documentation set is released on an optical disc. This format allows for easy searches through all parts of the documentation set. The electronic file of each manual is also available from the Tekelec Customer Support site.

  • Page 18: Locate Product Documentation On The Customer Support Site

    Access to Tekelec's Customer Support site is restricted to current Tekelec customers only. This section describes how to log into the Tekelec Customer Support site and locate a document. Viewing the document requires Adobe Acrobat Reader, which can be downloaded at www.adobe.com.
  • Page 19 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure Introduction Gateway Note: In normal operation, the E5-based control cards and the legacy control cards cannot be mixed in one EAGLE 5 ISS control shelf. Legacy Control Cards The legacy set of EAGLE 5 ISS control cards consists of the following cards: Two MASP card sets;...

  • Page 20: Eagle 5 Iss Database Partitions

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure Introduction Gateway and performs both application and communication processing. E5-MCAP cards are located in slots 1113 and 1115 of the control shelf. Each E5-MCAP card contains two USB ports. One latched USB port is used with removable flash media (“thumb drives”), and one flush-mounted USB port is used with a plug-in “credit card”...

  • Page 21: Figure 1: Eagle 5 Iss Database Partitions (Legacy Control Cards)

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure Introduction Gateway Figure 1: EAGLE 5 ISS Database Partitions (Legacy Control Cards) 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...

  • Page 22: Figure 2: Eagle 5 Iss Database Partitions (E5-Based Control Cards)

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure Introduction Gateway Figure 2: EAGLE 5 ISS Database Partitions (E5-Based Control Cards) Fixed Disk Drive There are two fixed disk drives on the EAGLE 5 ISS. The fixed disk drives contain the “master” set of data and programs for the EAGLE 5 ISS.
  • Page 23 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure Introduction Gateway Backup partition Measurements partition Generic program loads (GPLs) partition The data which can be administered by users is stored in two partitions on the fixed disk, a current database partition which has the tables which are changed by on-line administration, and a backup database partition which is a user-controlled copy of the current partition.

  • Page 24: Chapter 2: Ip7 Secure Gateway Overview

    Chapter IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Topics: Chapter 2, IP7 Secure Gateway Overview, describes the basics of the IP7 Secure Gateway functionality. Introduction..25 Hardware, Applications, and Functions..25 IP Connections..26 Point-to-Point Connectivity (IPLIM or IPLIMI Application)..37 Point-to-Multipoint Connectivity (SS7IPGW and IPGWI)..38 SNMP Agent Implementation..45 Mixed Networks Using the ANSI/ITU MTP Gateway Feature..47...

  • Page 25: Introduction

    SS7 message to be constructed for routing to the SS7 network. Hardware, Applications, and Functions The IP7 Secure Gateway functionality is provided by applications that run on IP cards, either a single-slot Enhanced-Performance Database Communications Module (EDCM) or E5-ENET card. IP cards provide interfaces between the IMT bus and two 10/100 Base-T IEEE 802.3/DIX Ethernet...

  • Page 26: Ip Connections

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway of the ANSI, ITU-N, and ITU-I networks, switch traffic between these networks, and perform Mixed Networks network management for each of these networks (for more information, see Using the ANSI/ITU MTP Gateway Feature).

  • Page 27: Figure 3: Sctp Association Database Relationships

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway SS7 signaling link – specified by the loc and link parameters of the ent-slk command. The local host is mapped to a particular Ethernet interface on the IP card by linking the local host name of the IP connection to an IP address with the ent-ip-host command.

  • Page 28: Table 2: Ethernet Interface And Signaling Link Combinations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway The numbers of signaling link ports and Ethernet interfaces on IP cards varies depending on the card Table 2: Ethernet Interface and Signaling Link type and application running on the card, as shown in Combinations.

  • Page 29: Figure 4: Ip Connections Using An Edcm Or E5-Enet Card Running The Ipgwx Applications

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 4: IP Connections using an EDCM or E5-ENET Card running the IPGWx Applications The assignment of the transport protocol port number is made through the local host port (lport) and remote host port (rport) parameters of the ent-assoc or chg-assoc commands (for an SCTP association).

  • Page 30: Figure 5: Typical Sctp Association Configuration

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 5: Typical SCTP Association Configuration The IP connection defined by the SCTP association is from local host ipnode-1204 (190.50.1.139), SCTP port 2048, to remote host remote-node-2 (190.50.1.144), SCTP port 3529, using Ethernet interface B on IP card 1204, and signaling link A on IP card 1204.

  • Page 31: Figure 7: Ip Connections Using E5-Enet Cards Running The Iplimx Applications

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway host and alternate host assigned to a signaling link must use different Ethernet interfaces; they cannot Figure 7: IP Connections using E5-ENET Cards running the be assigned to the same Ethernet interface.

  • Page 32: Table 3: Uni-Homed And Multi-Homed Node Combinations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Table 3: Uni-Homed and Multi-Homed Node Combinations Node A Node B Uni-homed Uni-homed Uni-homed Multi-homed Multi-homed Uni-homed Multi-homed Multi-homed Multi-Homed Associations on EDCMs or E5-ENET Cards Running the IPLIMx Application A multi-homed association on an IPLIMx card uses both Ethernet interfaces to reach the remote host, but only one signaling link.

  • Page 33: Figure 8: Multi-Homed Associations On Edcms Or E5-Enet Cards Running The Iplimx Applications

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 8: Multi-Homed Associations on EDCMs or E5-ENET Cards running the IPLIMx Applications Multi-Homed Associations on EDCMs or E5-ENET Cards Running the IPGWx Applications A multi-homed association on an IPGWx card uses both Ethernet interfaces to reach the remote host, but only one signaling link, signaling link A on the IPGWx card.

  • Page 34: Figure 9: Multi-Homed Associations On Edcms Or E5-Enet Cards Running The Ipgwx Applications

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway EAGLE 5 ISS, so only one remote host is shown in Figure 9: Multi-Homed Associations on EDCMs or E5-ENET Cards running the IPGWx Applications. Figure 9: Multi-Homed Associations on EDCMs or E5-ENET Cards running the IPGWx Applications...

  • Page 35: Figure 10: Multi-Homed Association Database Relationships

    189.20.30.137 over SCTP port 3425, using signaling link B on card 1201. Routing The IP7 Secure Gateway functionality in the EAGLE 5 ISS support two transport protocols – TCP and SCTP. Although both transport protocols are connection oriented, they differ greatly with respect to operation in a multi-homed host environment.
  • Page 36 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway In previous releases, an SCTP IETF endpoint could only operate as a uni-homed host using only the Ethernet A interface. In this mode, any SCTP transmission received on or transmitted out of the Ethernet B interface are silently discarded.

  • Page 37: Point-To-Point Connectivity (Iplim Or Iplimi Application)

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway IP address (that is, the gateway IP address must share the network portion of one of the two Ethernet interfaces). When an IP packet is to be transmitted the IP routing table must be interrogated to determine where to send the IP datagram.

  • Page 38: Point-To-Multipoint Connectivity (Ss7Ipgw And Ipgwi)

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 11: EAGLE 5 ISS Network (STP Connectivity via MTP-over-IP) Point-to-Multipoint Connectivity (SS7IPGW and IPGWI) The following sections describe the types of point-to-multipoint connectivity, how routing is accomplished, and the MTP status functions provided by the ss7ipgw and ipgwi applications: Connecting to SCPs with SCCP/TCAP Messages Sent Over the IP Network Connecting SEPs Using ISUP, Q.BICC, and TUP Messages Over the IP Network...

  • Page 39: Figure 12: Ip Network (Scp Connectivity Via Tcap-Over-Ip)

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 12: IP Network (SCP Connectivity via TCAP-over-IP) The EAGLE 5 ISS manages the virtual point codes and subsystem numbers for the IP-SCP. From the SS7 network perspective, the TCAP queries are routed using these virtual point codes/SSNs. The...

  • Page 40: Figure 13: Ip Network (Sep Connectivity Via Isup, Q.bicc, And Tup-Over-Ip)

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 13: IP Network (SEP connectivity via ISUP, Q.BICC, and TUP-over-IP) The EAGLE 5 ISS maps the originating point code, destination point code, and circuit identification code to an IP connection. The SEP is provided the originating and destination point codes in the MTP level 3 routing label as part of the passed protocol.

  • Page 41: Table 4: Ss7 Full Routing Keys Per Ipgwx Functionality

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Routing keys can be fully or partially specified, or specified by default. Full Routing Keys For this routing application, all applicable fields in the Message Signaling Unit (MSU) must match the contents of the full routing key.

  • Page 42: Table 5: Example Ss7 Routing Key Table

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Partial Routing Keys Partially specified routing keys are explicitly, but not completely defined. These routing keys ignore some of the contents of the MSU. The parts of the MSU that are ignored are specific. For example, for the ‘ignore cic’...

  • Page 43: Table 6: Routing Key Lookup Hierarchy

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway SS7 DPC SS7 SI SS7 SSN SS7 OPC CIC START CIC END Name of IP Routing Key Routing Key Routing Key Routing Key Routing Key Routing Key Connections Parameter...
  • Page 44 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Type of MSU Lookup Order Segment of MSU that Must Match Routing Key Type per MSU Type Routing Key dpc + si (ignore opc & cic) Partial dpc (ignore si, opc & cic) Partial si (ignore dpc, opc &...

  • Page 45: Snmp Agent Implementation

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Build up routing tables before sending traffic Be warned about network congestion Abate congestion (ss7ipgw application only) Obtain SS7 User Part Unavailability status SNMP Agent Implementation This feature implements a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) agent on each IP card that runs the ss7ipgw, ipgwi, iplim, or iplimi applications.

  • Page 46: Table 8: Deviations From Snmp Protocols

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Group Name Description Contents Information about UDP operation 4 scalar objects that maintain UDP-related datagram statistics, and a table that contains address and port information snmp Details about SNMP objects...

  • Page 47: Mixed Networks Using The Ansi/Itu Mtp Gateway Feature

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Group Variable Name Usage Deviation <CLLI>-<slot of IP card> sysName Administratively Cannot be set by Set command; assigned name for agent internally set using configuration data already available; set to <CLLI>-<slot of IP card>...
  • Page 48 IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway that support ANSI, ITU-I, and ITU-N protocols. For more information on the ANSI/ITU MTP Gateway feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative. Figure 14: Complex Network with ANSI, ITU-I, and ITU-N Nodes shows an example of a complex network that includes all these types of nodes.

  • Page 49: Figure 14: Complex Network With Ansi, Itu-I, And Itu-N Nodes

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 14: Complex Network with ANSI, ITU-I, and ITU-N Nodes Table 9: Nodes and Point Codes in Complex Network Example Node Node Type Network Types True Point Alias Point...
  • Page 50 Notes: 1. A true point code (TPC) defines a destination in the EAGLE 5 ISS’s destination point code table.A TPC is a unique identifier of a node in a network. An STP (with IP7 Secure Gateway functionality) must have a TPC for each network type that the EAGLE 5 ISS connects to. An SSP connects to only one type of network, so it has only one TPC.
  • Page 51 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway The following steps demonstrate how an EAGLE 5 ISS routes and converts when an ITU-N node sends Figure 14: Complex Network with an MSU to another ITU-N node. For example, assume that Node 11 in ANSI, ITU-I, and ITU-N Nodes sends an MSU to Node 14.

  • Page 52: Ietf Adapter Layer Support

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Routing Label, Destination Point Code (DPC) — the DPC is replaced with the destination’s true point code. In this example, N16 is replaced by I16. Routing Label, Originating Point Code (OPC) — the OPC is replaced with the appropriate network type’s alias point code for the originating node.

  • Page 53: Figure 15: As/Association Relationship

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 15: AS/Association Relationship Feature Components The EAGLE 5 ISS with IP Secure Gateway functionality is used as a signaling gateway between the PSTN and IP networks as shown in Figure 16: SG/MGC/MG Network Diagram.

  • Page 54: Figure 17: Iplimx Protocol Stack With Sctp As The Transport Layer

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 17: IPLIMx Protocol Stack with SCTP as the Transport Layer Figure 18: IPGWx Protocol Stack with SCTP as the Transport Layer SUA Layer The SUA layer, only supported on IP cards running either the SS7IPGW or IPGWI applications (IPGWx cards), was designed to fit the need for the delivery of SCCP-user messages (MAP &...
  • Page 55 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Support for transfer of SS7 SCCP-User Part messages (for example, TCAP, RANAP, etc.) Support for SCCP connectionless service. Support for the seamless operation of SCCP-User protocol peers Support for the management of SCTP transport associations between a signaling gateway and one or more IP-based signaling nodes).

  • Page 56: Figure 19: M2Pa In The Ip7 Signaling Gateway

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Support for the asynchronous reporting of status changes to management The M3UA layer at an application server provides a set of primitives at its upper layer to the MTP3-Users that is the equivalent of those provided by the MTP Level 3 to its local users at an SS7 SEP.
  • Page 57 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 19: M2PA in the IP Signaling Gateway The M2PA layer receives the primitives sent from MTP3 to its lower layer. The M2PA layer processes these primitives or maps them to appropriate primitives at the M2PA/SCTP interface. Likewise, the M2PA layer sends primitives to MTP3 like those used in the MTP3/MTP2 interface.
  • Page 58 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Broader Definition of Connection Four-Tuple The TCP protocol defines a connection via a four-tuple – a specific local IP address, local transport protocol port, a specific remote host IP address and remote transport protocol port. The TCP connection is point-to-point and once the session is established the four-tuple can not change.

  • Page 59: Figure 20: Sctp Connectivity

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Un-order Delivery Capability The SCTP protocol provides a mechanism for un-ordered datagram delivery. This feature means that a datagram can be transmitted and received independent of datagram sequencing and thus not delayed while awaiting a retransmission.

  • Page 60: Table 10: Sample Sctp Endpoints

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 20: SCTP Connectivity there are three hosts: SCTP node A, node B and node C. Node A has two SCTP instances: local SCTP port 2000 and 2100. Both node B and node C have a single SCTP instance, local SCTP port 3000 and 3000 respectively.

  • Page 61: Table 11: Sample Sctp Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Table 11: Sample SCTP Associations Association Local IP Address Local SCTP Remote IP Address Remote Port SCTP Port 192.168.110.10 Association-1 2000 192.168.110.20 3000 192.168.55.10 192.168.110.10 192.168.110.30 Association-2 2000 3000 192.168.55.10...

  • Page 62: Ip Signaling Gateway (Ipsg)

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Association Stream Local IP Address Local Remote IP Address Remote Number SCTP Port SCTP Port 192.168.110.10 192.168.110.30 Association-2 Stream 0 In 2000 3000 192.168.55.10 192.168.55.30 192.168.110.10 192.168.110.30 Association-3 Stream 0 Out...
  • Page 63 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Each IPSG card can host up to 32 SCTP associations. A maximum of 16 M3UA links or 1 M2PA link can be assigned to an association. M3UA and M2PA cannot be mixed on the same association.

  • Page 64: Figure 21: Ip Signaling Gateway Database Relationships

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IP7 Secure Gateway Overview Gateway Figure 21: IP Signaling Gateway Database Relationships 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...

  • Page 65: Chapter 3: Ietf M2Pa Configuration Procedures

    Chapter IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Topics: Chapter 3, IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures, describes the procedures necessary to configure the Adding IETF IPLIMx Components..67 components necessary to establish IP connections Adding an IPLIMx Card..68 using M2PA associations on IPLIMx signaling links. Adding an IPLIMx Signaling Link..75 Configuring an IP Link..95 Adding an IP Host..114...
  • Page 66 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Turning Off the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Feature ..261 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...

  • Page 67: Adding Ietf Iplimx Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding IETF IPLIMx Components This section describes how to configure the components necessary to establish IP connections using M2PA associations on IPLIMx signaling links. IPLIMx signaling links are signaling links assigned to cards running either the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications.

  • Page 68: Adding An Iplimx Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway changed by performing the Adding an M2PA Association procedure. An IPLIMx card can have one association for each signaling link assigned to the card. 11. There are two versions of M2PA associations, RFC and Draft 6, that can be configured in the database.
  • Page 69 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway :force – If the global title translation feature is on, the force=yes parameter allows the LIM to be added to the database even if the current SCCP transactions-per-second threshold is unable to support the additional SCCP transaction-per-second capacity created by adding the IP card.
  • Page 70 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2311 IPLIMI 2313 IPLIMI Continue the procedure by performing one of these steps. Card Slot Selection) are shown in the If the required unprovisioned card slots (see the section rtrv-card output, continue the procedure with Step If the required unprovisioned card slots are not shown in the rtrv-card output,...
  • Page 71 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway HIPR 1110 125-002-000 125-002-000 125-003-000 HIPR 1209 125-002-000 125-002-000 125-003-000 HIPR 1210 125-002-000 125-002-000 125-003-000 HIPR 1309 125-002-000 125-002-000 125-003-000 HIPR 1310 125-002-000 125-002-000 125-003-000 HIPR 2109 125-002-000 125-002-000 125-003-000 HIPR 2110...
  • Page 72 Step The Fan feature must be purchased before you turn this feature on with the chg-feat command. If you are not sure if you have purchased the Fan feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. 8. Enter the rtrv-feat command to verify that the Fan feature is on.
  • Page 73 This section is in the Adding an IPLIMx Card” procedure This procedure cannot be in the Database Administration performed as no card Manual IP7 Secure Gateway. slots are available for the new card. Enter the ent-shlf command with these parameters. Has UAM loc=<location of the shelf: 1200,...
  • Page 74 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Is the IP card being provisioned in this procedure an E5-ENET card? Enter the rept-stat-gpl:gpl=hipr command. Is the card Are HIPR cards that is being added E5-ENET installed in card locations an E5-ENET or an...

  • Page 75: Adding An Iplimx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Enter the rtrv-stpopts command. Refer to "Configuring Is the MFC option the MFC Option” turned on? procedure to turn on the MFC option. Enter the Is the Fan chg-feat command feature turned with this parameter.
  • Page 76 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway :link – The signaling link on the card specified in the loc parameter. :lsn – The name of the linkset that will contain the signaling link. :slc – The signaling link code. The SLC must be unique within the linkset. It must be the same at both the EAGLE 5 ISS location and the distant node.
  • Page 77 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway to allow the IPLIMx signaling link to be added. The available TPS can be reduced by performing one or more of these actions. The IP TPS values of some IPGWx linksets have to be changed. The MAXSLKTPS values of some IPSG linksets (and the RSVDSLKTPS values if necessary) have to be changed.
  • Page 78 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the addition of the new signaling link will not exceed the maximum number of signaling links Step 2 the EAGLE 5 ISS can have, continue the procedure with If the addition of the new signaling link will exceed the maximum number of signaling links the EAGLE 5 ISS can have, and the maximum number of signaling links is less than 2800, perform the Enabling the Large System # Links Controlled Feature...
  • Page 79 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway lsniplim 1302 LIMATM ATMANSI 1303 ENET IPSG ipsglsn ipsglsn ipsglsn ipsglsn ipsglsn ipsglsn2 1304 LIMATM ATMANSI 1305 LIMATM ATMANSI lsnds0 1306 LIME1ATM ATMITU lsnituatm 1307 ENET IPSG ipsglsn 1311 IPLIM 1312 LIMDS0...
  • Page 80 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 LINK LSN SLC TYPE SET BPS TSEL 1303 A lsnds0 LIMATM 1.544M LINE E1ATM LINK LSN SLC TYPE SET BPS TSEL...
  • Page 81 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway The IP TPS values of some IPGWx linksets have to be changed. To perform this action, continue Step the procedure with The MAXSLKTPS values of some IPSG linksets (and the RSVDSLKTPS values if necessary) have to be changed.
  • Page 82 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipgwx1 001-001-002 none 1...
  • Page 83 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. rtrv-ls:lsn=ipgwx3 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS...
  • Page 84 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. rtrv-ls:lsn=ipsglsn2 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS...
  • Page 85 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway LINK LSN SLC TYPE SET BPS TSEL 1305 A lsnds0 LIMATM 1.544M LINE E1ATM LINK LSN SLC TYPE SET BPS TSEL CRC4 SI SN 1306 A lsnituatm LIME1ATM 21 2.048M LINE LINK LSN SLC TYPE...
  • Page 86 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCN (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS lsipgw 2968 none 1 off off off no Link set table is (10 of 1024) 1% full. If the desired linkset is not in the database, perform one of these procedures to add the linkset to the database.

  • Page 87: Table 14: M2Pa Iplimx Signaling Link Parameter Combinations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Table 14: M2PA IPLIMx Signaling Link Parameter Combinations shows the parameters and values that can be specified with the ent-slk command. Table 14: M2PA IPLIMx Signaling Link Parameter Combinations M2PA IPLIMx Signaling Link Mandatory Parameters :loc = location of the IP card with one of these applications: IPLIM or IPLIMI;...
  • Page 88 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway rtrv-slk:loc=2204:link=b This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 LINK LSN SLC TYPE IPLIML2 2204 B lsnlp2 IPLIM M2PA rtrv-slk:loc=2205:link=a This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 LINK LSN SLC TYPE...
  • Page 89 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway should be in service normal (IS-NR) after the link has completed alignment (shown in the PST field). For this example, enter these commands. rept-stat-slk:loc=2204:link=b This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 07-05-23 13:06:25 GMT EAGLE5 37.0.0 CLLI 2204,B...
  • Page 90 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-tbl-capacity command. Will the addition This procedure cannot be What is the of the signaling link performed. The EAGLE 5 2800 maximum number of signaling exceed the maximum number of ISS can contain a links the EAGLE 5 ISS can signaling links the EAGLE...
  • Page 91 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Note: The maximum total provisioned system TPS cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS. What is the maximum total 750,000 provisioned system TPS value? See the Note. To add the signaling link , one or more of these actions 500,000 must be performed.
  • Page 92 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 2 cannot be performed. or 4 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 4 perform? Remove ATM Remove an...
  • Page 93 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any From Enter the rept-stat-iptps linksets shown in Sheet 3 command. the rept-stat-iptps output? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. Are any linksets :lsn=<linkset name shown in shown with the value the rept-stat-iptps output>...

  • Page 94: Figure 23: Adding An Iplimx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 1, 2, 3, or 4 Enter the ent-slk command. Use the M2PA IPLIMx Signaling Link Parameter Combinations table in the Adding an IPLIMx Signaling Link” procedure in the Enter the rtrv-slk command with these Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure parameters for each signaling link added...

  • Page 95: Configuring An Ip Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Configuring an IP Link This procedure is used to configure the link parameters for IP cards using the chg-ip-lnk command. These link parameters are used to configure the Ethernet hardware. The chg-ip-lnk command uses the following parameters.

  • Page 96: Table 15: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway The IP address and subnet mask values cannot be changed to an address representing a different network if: If the network interface specified by the loc and port parameters has a default router, dnsa, or dsnb parameter values assigned to it, as shown in the rtrv-ip-card output.
  • Page 97 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Network Class IP Network Address Range Valid Subnet Mask Values 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 If a Class B IP address is specified for the ipaddr parameter of the chg-ip-lnk command, the subnet address that results from the ipaddr and submask parameter values cannot be the same as the subnet address that results from the pvn and pvnmask , fcna and fcnamask, or fcnb and fcnbmask parameter values of the chg-netopts command.
  • Page 98 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2101 192.1.1.20 255.255.255.0 FULL 2101 --------------- --------------- HALF 2103 192.1.1.22 255.255.255.0 FULL 2103 --------------- --------------- HALF 2105 192.1.1.24 255.255.255.0 FULL 2105 --------------- --------------- HALF 2205 192.1.1.30 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32...
  • Page 99 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 4. Retrieve the status of the signaling link assigned to the IP card to be changed using the rept-stat-slk command. For example, enter this command. rept-stat-slk:loc=1201:link=a The output lists the signaling link assigned to this card: rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 1201,A...
  • Page 100 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway IMT BUS A = Conn IMT BUS B = Conn SIGNALING LINK STATUS CLLI IS-NR nc001 ----------- Command Completed. If the IP card to be inhibited is in service-normal (IS-NR), continue the procedure with Step 8 inhibit the card.
  • Page 101 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway DOMAIN --------------- SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- If the rtrv-ip-card output shows an IP address for the default router (DEFROUTER) whose Configuring network portion matches the network portion of the IP address being changed, go to the an IP Card procedure and change the IP address of the default router to 0.0.0.0.
  • Page 102 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 13. Display the associations referencing the local host name that is associated with the IP link being changed by entering the rtrv-assoc command and specifying the local host name shown in the rtrv-ip-host output in Step For this example, enter this command.
  • Page 103 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway This message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:20:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Card has been allowed. 17. Verify the in-service normal (IS-NR) status of the IP card using the rept-stat-card command. For example, enter this command.
  • Page 104 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the IP address of the default router was not changed to 0.0.0.0 in Step 10 , continue the procedure with Step 21. Perform the Adding an IP Route procedure and add the IP routes back into the database.
  • Page 105 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk command Is the ipaddr=0.0.0.0 parameter to be specified with the chg-ip-lnk command? Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter. :display=all Is the current IP address of the IP link shown in the rtrv-ip-host output? Perform the "Removing an IP...
  • Page 106 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Is the state of the signaling link OOS-MT-DSBLD? Enter the dact-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card Enter the location of the signaling link>...
  • Page 107 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Are the ipaddr or submask paramter values being Sheet 6 changed? Enter the rtrv-ip-card command with the loc value of the IP link being changed Is the IP address being changed to a Sheet 4 different network?
  • Page 108 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Does the defrouter parameter have a value assigned? Does the network portion of the defrouter parameter match the network portion of the IP address not being changed or the new IP address? Enter the Perform the "Configuring...
  • Page 109 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 3 or 4 Is a Class B IP address to be specified for the new IP address of the IP link? Enter the rtrv-netopts command Is error message E3967 displayed? Choose values for the ipaddr and submask parameters of the...
  • Page 110 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Was a local From host removed on Sheet 1 Sheets 3 with the "Removing an IP or 5 Host" procedure? Enter the rtrv-assoc command with the lhost value shown in the rtrv-ip-host output from Sheet 1 Does the rtrv-assoc output show...
  • Page 111 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 6 Enter the chg-ip-lnk command with these mandatory parameters: :loc=<card location of the link> :port=<the ethernet interface on the card, A or B> and with at least one of these optional parameters: :ipaddr = <IP address>...
  • Page 112 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 7 Was the state of the signaling link changed on Sheet 2? Enter the act-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card Were the ipaddr or...
  • Page 113 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 8 Was an IP route removed on Sheets 3 or 4? Perform the "Adding an IP Route" procedure and add the IP route back to the database Was the open parameter value changed for an association on Sheet 6?

  • Page 114: Adding An Ip Host

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IP Host This procedure associates hostnames with IP addresses using the ent-ip-host command. The ent-ip-host command uses the following parameters. :host– The host name to be associated with the IP address. This parameter identifies the logical name assigned to the device with the IP address indicated.
  • Page 115 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2101 192.1.1.20 255.255.255.0 FULL 2101 --------------- --------------- HALF 2103 192.1.1.22 255.255.255.0 FULL 2103 --------------- --------------- HALF 2105 192.1.1.24 255.255.255.0 FULL 2105 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF 2213 192.1.1.50...

  • Page 116: Figure 25: Adding An Ip Host

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter.

  • Page 117: Configuring An Ip Card

    IP addresses consist of the system’s network number and the machine’s unique host number. :domain – The domain name is used to construct a fully-qualified DNS name consisting of 120 characters or less. For example, a domain name can be tekelec.com, the hostname is john.doe. The fully-qualified DNS name would be john.doe@tekelec.com.
  • Page 118 --------------- SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1203 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1205 SRCHORDR SRVRONLY DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM...
  • Page 119 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- To change the parameters of an IP card, the signaling link to the card and the card have to be inhibited. 2. Display the signaling link associated with the card shown in Step 1 using the rtrv-slk command specifying the card location.
  • Page 120 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway The output displays the link status as OOS-MT-DSBLD and gives off a minor alarm: rlghncxa03w 06-10-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 1201,A nc001 ----------- OOS-MT-DSBLD AVAIL ALARM STATUS = * 0236 REPT-LKS:not aligned UNAVAIL REASON = NA Command Completed.
  • Page 121 Verify the sctpcsum parameter value by entering the rtrv-sg-opts command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-13 09:19:43 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 SRKQ: 1500 SNMPCONT: tekelec GETCOMM: public SETCOMM: private TRAPCOMM: public...
  • Page 122 08-06-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 39.0.0 LOC 1201 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM adler32 BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- Note: If Step 7 was not performed, continue the procedure with Step 13. Allow the IP card that was inhibited in Step 7 by using the alw-card command.
  • Page 123 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD VERSION TYPE 1201 114-000-000 IPLIM IS-NR Active ----- ALARM STATUS = No Alarms. BPDCM GPL = 002-102-000 IMT BUS A = Conn...
  • Page 124 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ip-card command Enter the rtrv-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link from rtrv-ip-card output> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card> command Is the state of the signaling link OOS-MT-DSBLD?
  • Page 125 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Is the state of From rept-stat-card:loc=<card the card Sheet 1 location> command OOS-MT-DSBLD? Enter the Enter the rept-stat-card:loc=<card inh-card:loc=<card location> command location> command Is the defrouter parameter to be specified with the chg-ip-card command? Does the network...
  • Page 126 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Will the sctpcsum parameter value be changed? Enter the rtrv-sg-opts command What is the current value of the PERCARD sctpcsum parameter shown in the rtrv-sg-opts output? ADLER32, CRC32C Perform the Changing the SCTP...

  • Page 127: Figure 26: Configuring An Ip Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Enter the Notes: chg-ip-card:loc=<card location> command 1. Either the domain or rstdomain parameters can with at least one of these parameters: be specified, but not both. :srchordr = <local, srvr, srvronly>...

  • Page 128: Adding An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IP Route This procedure is used to add an IP route to the database using the ent-ip-rte command. The ent-ip-rte command uses these parameters. :loc – The location of the IP card that the IP route will be assigned to. :dest –...

  • Page 129: Table 17: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Table 17: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values Network Class IP Network Address Range Valid Subnet Mask Values 255.0.0.0 (the default value for a class A IP address) 255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0 1.0.0.0 to 127.0.0.0 255.248.0.0...
  • Page 130 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-08-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 39.0.0 LOC 1212 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 150.1.1.1 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER 150.1.1.100 DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1301 SRCHORDR SRVRONLY DNSA 140.188.13.10 DNSB 140.190.15.28...
  • Page 131 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Display the pvn, pvnmask, fcna, fcnamask, fcnb, and fcnbmask parameter values of the chg-netopts command by entering the rtrv-netoptscommand. If error message E3967 Cmd Rej: E5IS must be on is displayed after the rtrv-netopts command is executed, the pvn, pvnmask, fcna, fcnamask, fcnb, and fcnbmask parameters are not configured.
  • Page 132 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Enter the rtrv-ip-rte command rtrv-ip-card command Perform the "Adding an IPLIMx Card" procedure in Is the required this chapter to add the IP card in the required IP card to the database? database Perform the "Changing an IP Card"...

  • Page 133: Figure 27: Adding An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the ent-ip-rte command with these parameters: :loc=<IP card location> :dest = <IP address of the remote host or network> :submask = <subnet mask of the destination IP address>...

  • Page 134: Adding An M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an M2PA Association This procedure is used to configure M2PA associations using the ent-assoc command. The combination of a local host, local SCTP port, remote host and remote SCTP port defines an association. M2PA associations are assigned to cards running either the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications (IPLIMx cards).
  • Page 135 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway An M2PA association that is assigned to an IPLIMx signaling link can contain a UA parameter set value (the uaps parameter). The uaps parameter cannot be specified with the ent-assoc command. The default value for the uaps parameter is 10.
  • Page 136 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway The ipliml2 parameter value of the signaling link assigned to the association must be m2pa. The adapter parameter value of the association must be m2pa. The signaling link being assigned to the association must be out of service. This state is shown in the rept-stat-slk output with the entries OOS-MT in the PST field and Unavail in the SST field.
  • Page 137 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the desired IP link (shown by the entries in the CARD LOC and IPLINK PORT columns for an association whose ADAPTER value is M2PA) is shown in the rtrv-assoc output, continue Step the procedure with If the desired IP link is not shown in the rtrv-assoc output, continue the procedure with...

  • Page 138: Figure 24: Configuring An Ip Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP-LNK table is (20 of 2048) 1% full. If the required IP link is not in the database, add the IP link using the Configuring an IP Link procedure. 4.
  • Page 139 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 6. Display the status of the signaling link shown in Step 5 using the rept-stat-slk command specifying the card location and signaling link. For example, enter this command. rept-stat-slk:loc=1203:link=a This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 140 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway rtrv-m2pa-tset:ver=d6 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 M2PA Draft 6 Timers (in msec, T16 in microsec) TSET T1 6000 ------ 5000 20000 500 5000 4000 1000...
  • Page 141 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 175000 12500 12500 45000 500 1100 2600 1300 7000 1000 5000 1000 1000 1000 200 If the ver parameter is not specified when entering the rtrv-m2pa-tset command, both the Draft 6 and RFC values are displayed.
  • Page 142 Changing the Buffer Size of a M2PA Association procedure. 11. Add the associations using the ent-assoc command. For this example, enter this command. ent-assoc:aname=assoc2:lhost=gw107.nc.tekelec.com:lport=2000: rhost=gw100.nc.tekelec.com:rport=1030:adapter=m2pa:link=a These are the rules that apply to adding M2PA associations that are assigned to IPLIMx signaling links.
  • Page 143 12. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc2 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 ANAME assoc2 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE...
  • Page 144 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-07 11:11:28 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 Activate Link message sent to card 15. Verify the status of the signaling link using the rept-stat-slk command. For example, enter this command.
  • Page 145 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command. Is the required Is the required IP link shown in the Enter the IP link in the IP Link rtrv-assoc output? (See rtrv-ip-lnk command. table? Note 1) Perform the "Configuring an IP Link"...
  • Page 146 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rept-stat-slk command with these Is the desired From parameters. signaling link shown in the Sheet 1 :loc = <card location of the IP signaling link> rtrv-slk output? :link = <signaling link assigned to the card>...

  • Page 147: Figure 28: Adding An M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the ent-assoc command with these mandatory parameters: :aname=<association name> :lhost = <local host name from the rtrv-ip-host output> and with at least one of these optional parameters. :lport = <local port ID> From :rhost = <remote host name>...

  • Page 148: Activating The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    The enable-ctrl-feat command enables the controlled feature by inputting the controlled feature’s access key and the controlled feature’s part number with these parameters: :fak – The feature access key provided by Tekelec. The feature access key contains 13 alphanumeric characters and is not case sensitive.
  • Page 149 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature is enabled and turned on. UIMs are displayed when most of these circumstances occur. These UIMs are: UIM 1333 – Displayed when a large message is received on an M3UA association and the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature is not enabled or is enabled and turned off.
  • Page 150 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the rtrv-ctrl-feat output in Step 1 shows any controlled features, continue this procedure with Step 6. If the rtrv-ctrl-feat output shows only the HC-MIM SLK Capacity feature with a quantity of 64, Step 2 through Step 5...
  • Page 151 Note: A temporary feature access key cannot be specified to enable this feature. Note: The values for the feature access key (the fak parameter) are provided by Tekelec. If you do not have the feature access key for the feature you wish to enable, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative.
  • Page 152 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 9. Back up the new changes using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete.
  • Page 153 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Sheet 1 of 4 Are any controlled From features shown in the Sheet 1 rtrv-ctrl-feat output? (See Note 1) Enter the rtrv-serial-num command Is the EAGLE 5 ISS's serial number in the database correct and is the serial number locked? Sheet 4...
  • Page 154 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the ent-serial-num Is the EAGLE command with these From 5 ISS's serial number parameters: Sheet 2 in the database :serial=<EAGLE 5 ISS's correct? serial number> :lock=yes Sheet 4 Is the EAGLE 5 ISS's serial number locked?

  • Page 155: Figure 29: Activating The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    Notes: 1. If you do not have the feature access key for the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature, contact your Tekelec sales representative or account representative. 2. This feature can only be permanently enabled. Enter the...

  • Page 156: Removing Ietf M2Pa Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing IETF M2PA Components This section describes how to remove the following components from the database. An IPLIMx Card – Perform the Removing an IPLIMx Card procedure An IPLIMx Signaling Link – Perform the Removing an IPLIMx Signaling Link procedure An IP Host –...
  • Page 157 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway The dlt-card command has only one parameter, loc, which is the location of the card. For this example, enter these commands. dlt-card:loc=1205 dlt-card:loc=1207 When these commands have successfully completed, this message appears. rlghncxa03w 06-10-12 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 DLT-CARD: MASP A - COMPLTD 3.

  • Page 158: Figure 30: Removing An Iplimx Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rtrv-card command The card being removed in this procedure must be running the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications.

  • Page 159: Removing An Iplimx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing an IPLIMx Signaling Link This procedure is used to remove an IPLIMx signaling link from the database using the dlt-slk command. The dlt-slk command uses these parameters. :loc – The card location of the IPLIMx card that the IP signaling link is assigned to. :link –...
  • Page 160 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Press the F9 function key on the keyboard at the terminal where the rtrv-slk command was entered. Enter the canc-cmd without the trm parameter at the terminal where the rtrv-slk command was entered.
  • Page 161 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2. Display the linkset that contains the signaling link that is being removed by entering the rtrv-ls command with the name of the linkset shown in the LSN column of the rtrv-slk output. For this example, enter these commands.
  • Page 162 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 3. Display the LSRESTRICT option value by entering the rtrv-ss7opts command. This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-30 15:09:00 GMT 42.0.0 SS7 OPTIONS ----------------------- LSRESTRICT Note: The rtrv-feat command output contains other fields that are not used by this procedure. If you wish to see all the fields displayed by the rtrv-feat command, refer to the rtrv-feat command description in the Commands Manual.
  • Page 163 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PORT IPADDR SUBMASK DUPLEX SPEED MACTYPE AUTO MCAST 2204 192.1.1.10 255.255.255.128 HALF 802.3 2204 --------------- --------------- HALF 6.
  • Page 164 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 8. Change the value of the open and alw parameters to no by specifying the chg-assoc command with the open=no and alw=no parameters, as necessary. Note: If there is no association shown in Step 7, or the open and alw parameter values of the association shown in...
  • Page 165 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Before entering the dlt-slk command, enter the rmv-card command and specify the location of the card to be inhibited. The card location is shown in the output of rept-stat-slk command Step executed in In the example used for this procedure, the signaling link is the last signaling link on the card and...
  • Page 166 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-07 08:41:17 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 DLT-SLK: MASP A - COMPLTD Note: If removing the signaling link will result in 700 or less signaling links in the database and the OAMHCMEAS value in the rtrv-measopts output is on, the scheduled UI measurement reports will be enabled.
  • Page 167 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-slk command. Enter the A, B, D, rtrv-ls command with this What is the E, or PRX parameter. linkset type of the linkset :lsn=<the name of the linkset that displayed in the previous contains the signaling link that is step?

  • Page 168: Figure 31: Removing An Iplimx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk command with this rtrv-ip-host command with this From parameter. parameter. Sheet 1 :loc = <location of the signaling :ipaddr = <IP address shown in the link being removed>...

  • Page 169: Removing An Ip Host Assigned To An Iplimx Card

    192.1.1.32 KC-HLR2 192.1.1.50 DN-MSC1 192.1.1.52 DN-MSC2 192.3.3.33 GW100. NC. TEKELEC. COM REMOTE IPADDR REMOTE HOST 150.1.1.5 NCDEPTECONOMIC_DEVELOPMENT. SOUTHEASTERN_COORIDOR_ASHVL. GOV IP Host table is (12 of 2048) 1% full Step If the IP host that is being removed is a remote host, continue the procedure with...
  • Page 170 4. Display the associations referencing the host name being removed in this procedure by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the local host name. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:lhost=gw100.nc.tekelec.com The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0...
  • Page 171 5. Delete IP host information from the database by entering the dlt-ip-host command. For example, enter this command. dlt-ip-host:host=gw100.nc.tekelec.com When this command has successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:19:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 DLT-IP-HOST: MASP A - COMPLTD 6.

  • Page 172: Removing An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Remote Host Enter the rtrv-ip-host Is the host Name command with this name shown a local parameter. host name or a remote :display=all host name? Local Host Name Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk command Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this...
  • Page 173 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway The dlt-ip-rte command uses these parameters. :loc – The location of the IP card containing the IP route being removed. :dest – The IP address of the remote host or network assigned to the IP route being removed. :force –...
  • Page 174 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway inh-card:loc=1301 When this command has successfully completed, this message appears. rlghncxa03w 06-10-12 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Card has been inhibited. 4. Remove the IP route from the database using the dlt-ip-rte command. If the state of the IP card is not OOS-MT-DSBLD, the force=yes parameter must be specified with the dlt-ip-rte command.

  • Page 175: Figure 33: Removing An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rtrv-ip-rte command Enter the rept-stat-card:loc=<location of IP card containing the IP route...

  • Page 176: Removing An M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing an M2PA Association This procedure is used to remove an association from the database using the dlt-assoc command. The dlt-assoc command uses one parameter, aname, the name of the association being removed from the database.
  • Page 177 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway CARD TYPE APPL LSET NAME LINK SLC LSET NAME LINK SLC 1203 IPLIM lsn1 If the application assigned to the card is IPLIM or IPLIMI, shown in the APPL column, continue the procedure with Step If the application assigned to the card is IPSG, perform the...

  • Page 178: Changing Ietf M2Pa Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: The adapter value assigned to the :loc = <the location of the card association must be m2pa. containing the M2PA association that is shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...

  • Page 179: Changing The Attributes Of An M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway An M2PA Association – Perform these procedures. Changing the Attributes of an M2PA Association Changing the Buffer Size of a M2PA Association Changing the Host Values of a M2PA Association Changing the Link Value of a M2PA Association to another Link Value on the Same IPLIMx Card The SCTP retransmission parameters –...
  • Page 180 The RFC 2960 standard for congestion control is also used. lin – Tekelec's linear retransmission policy where each retransmission timeout value is the same as the initial transmission timeout and only the slow start algorithm is used for congestion control.
  • Page 181 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway :rtxthr – The retransmission threshold for the association. The rtxthr parameter value indicates the number of retransmissions that can occur on the association that when exceeded will generate UAM 0537, Ethernet Error Threshold Exceeded. The value of this parameter is 0 to 65,535. The value of this parameter is shown in the RTXTHR field of the rtrv-assoc:aname=<association name>...
  • Page 182 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Because the rtrv-assoc command used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped. There are three ways that the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled.
  • Page 183 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway If only the values of the alw parameter is being changed, or the open parameter value is being changed to no, continue the procedure with Step If the value of the rtxthr parameter is being changed, continue the procedure with Step If the value of the open parameter value is being changed to yes, a signaling link must be assigned to the card shown in this step.
  • Page 184 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (8 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (1600 KB of 1600 KB) on LOC = 1205 Continue the procedure by performing one of these actions. If the cwmin and m2patset parameters will not be specified in this procedure, continue the procedure with Step 7...
  • Page 185 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway M2PA Draft 6 Timers (in msec, T16 in microsec) TSET T1 6000 ------ 5000 20000 500 5000 4000 1000 100000 150 7500 ------ 1500 2000 9000 1250 300 150000 175 100000 ------ 2000 3000 4000...
  • Page 186 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 6000 ------ 5000 20000 500 5000 4000 1000 100000 150 7500 ------ 1500 2000 9000 1250 300 150000 175 100000 ------ 2000 3000 4000 1500 500 170000 200 200000 ------ 20000 4000 6000 2000 700 480000 225...
  • Page 187 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 9. Change the association using the chg-assoc command. For this example, enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc2:rhost= gw200.nc-tekelec.com :rport=3000 :rtxthr=10000:rhostval=match If an alternate remote host is being specified for the association, for this example enter this command.
  • Page 188 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 ANAME assoc2 1205 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST IPNODE2-1205 ALHOST RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST gw210.nc-tekelec.com LPORT 2048 RPORT 3000 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX...
  • Page 189 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter. Note: If the open parameter value is being Enter the rtrv-assoc :loc = <the location of the card changed to yes, the association must command.
  • Page 190 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the chg-assoc command with these What is the From parameters. value of the open Sheet 1 :aname=<name of the parameter? association being changed> :open=no Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter.
  • Page 191 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is a remote Is the alternate From host value being remote host value being Sheet 2 changed? changed? Enter the chg-assoc command with this mandatory parameter. Specify the rhost parameter with the chg-assoc command.

  • Page 192: Figure 35: Changing The Attributes Of An M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 1 or 3 Perform the Do you wish Changing the Host to change the LHOST or Values of an M2PA ALHOST values of the Association” M2PA association ? procedure in this chapter.

  • Page 193: Changing The Buffer Size Of A M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Buffer Size of a M2PA Association This procedure is used to change the buffer size of a M2PA association, assigned to cards that are running the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications, using the chg-assoc command. If you wish to change the buffer size of M2PA associations assigned to cards that are running the IPSG application, perform Changing the Buffer Size of an IPSG Association procedure.
  • Page 194 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd without the trm parameter at the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered. Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered.
  • Page 195 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 4. Display the association being changed by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the aname parameter specified in Step 3 or the name of the association assigned to the card displayed in...
  • Page 196 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 6. Display each association shown in Step 5 by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the name of each association shown in Step For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc2 This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 197 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway RTIMES CWMIN 3000 UAPS OPEN RTXTHR 2000 RHOSTVAL RELAXED M2PATSET IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (8 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (1600 KB of 1600 KB) on LOC = 1205 7.
  • Page 198 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Attributes of an M2PA Association procedure to change the bufsize value so that the bufsize value is greater than or equal to the cwmin value. After the new bufsize Step value has been chosen or the cwmin value has been changed, continue the procedure with 10.
  • Page 199 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway These messages should appear; the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP.
  • Page 200 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: :loc = <the location of the card containing the association that will be changed, shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...
  • Page 201 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 The new buffer size for this association cannot exceed the available buffer size for the card. Do the buffers If you wish to increase the buffer size on the other associations for this association to a value that is assigned to the card need...
  • Page 202 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Either choose another value for the bufsize parameter that is Is the new bufsize greater than or equal to the value greater than or equal to cwmin value, or change the the cwmin parameter value? cwmin value by performing the...

  • Page 203: Figure 36: Changing The Buffer Size Of An M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Do you wish Perform the Changing the to change the LHOST or Host Values of an M2PA ALHOST values of the Association” procedure. M2PA association ? Perform the Changing the Do you wish to Link Value of an M2PA...

  • Page 204: Changing The Host Values Of A M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Host Values of a M2PA Association This procedure is used to change the host values of a M2PA association, assigned to cards that are running the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications, using the chg-assoc command. If you wish to change the attributes of M2PA associations assigned to cards that are running the IPSG application, perform Changing the Host Values of an IPSG Association procedure.
  • Page 205 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Other attributes of the M2PA Association - Changing the Attributes of an M2PA Association At least one optional parameter is required. The command input is limited to 150 characters, including the hostnames. The EAGLE 5 ISS can contain a maximum of 4000 connections (association to application server assignments).
  • Page 206 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT LINK ADAPTER LPORT RPORT OPEN ALW swbel32 1201 A M3UA 1030 2345 1305 A 1030 2345 1307 A 1030 2346 assoc1 1201 A M3UA 2000 1030 assoc2 2105 A...
  • Page 207 5. Verify that the local host name to be assigned to the association is in the database by entering the rtrv-ip-host:display=all command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-12-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 40.0.0 LOCAL IPADDR LOCAL HOST 192.1.1.10 IPNODE1-1201 192.1.1.12 GW105. NC. TEKELEC. COM 192.1.1.14 IPNODE1-1205 192.1.1.20 IPNODE2-1201 192.1.1.22 IPNODE2-1203 192.1.1.24 IPNODE2-1205 192.1.1.30...

  • Page 208: Figure 94: Configuring An Ip Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2103 192.1.1.22 255.255.255.0 FULL 2103 --------------- --------------- HALF 2105 192.1.1.24 255.255.255.0 FULL 2105 192.1.1.54 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 192.1.1.30 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF 2213 192.1.1.50...
  • Page 209 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 8. Display the signaling link associated with the association being changed using the rtrv-slk command and specifying the card location shown in Step 7, and the new link parameter value of the association for the link parameter value.
  • Page 210 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CARD VERSION TYPE 2105 114-000-000 IPLIM IS-NR Active ----- ALARM STATUS = No Alarms. BPDCM GPL = 002-102-000 IMT BUS A = Conn...
  • Page 211 Command Completed. 15. Change the association using the chg-assoc command. For this example, enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc2:lhost=m2pa2:alhost=m2pa3:rhost="gw200.nc-tekelec.com" These are the rules that apply to changing the host value of M2PA associations that are assigned to IPLIMx signaling links. If any optional parameters are not specified with the chg-assoc command, those values are not changed.
  • Page 212 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 ANAME assoc2 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST M2PA2 ALHOST M2PA3 RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 2048 RPORT 3000 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN...
  • Page 213 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 18. Activate the signaling link assigned to the association using the act-slk command. For example, enter this command. act-slk:loc=1203:link=a When this command has successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-07 11:11:28 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 Activate Link message sent to card 19.
  • Page 214 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: :loc = <the location of the card containing the association that will be changed, shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...
  • Page 215 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the association From that is being changed an Sheet 1 M2PA association ? Does the M2PA association contain an ALHOST value? Is removing the ALHOST value from this association the only action to Sheet 3 be performed in this...
  • Page 216 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter. :display=all Is the required host Enter the name shown in the rtrv-ip-lnk command rtrv-ip-host output? (See Note 1) Enter the rept-stat-card command with this parameter: Enter the...
  • Page 217 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Enter the rtrv-slk:loc=<card location of the Is the link IP signaling link associated with parameter value being the local host>:link=<new link changed? value being assigned to the association>...
  • Page 218 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Was the Enter the From rept-stat-card rept-stat-card:loc=<card Sheet 4 command performed location from the rtrv-ip-lnk on Sheet 3? output> command Was a new signaling link added Sheet 6 on Sheet 4? Enter the rtrv-slk command with these Enter the rept-stat-slk command parameters:...
  • Page 219 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 5 From Sheet 2 Enter the chg-assoc :aname=<name of the association being changed> command with these optional parameters: :lhost = <local host name from the rtrv-ip-host output> :lport = <TCP port for the local host>...

  • Page 220: Figure 37: Changing The Host Values Of A M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Notes: 1. If any optional parameters are not specified with the chg-assoc command, those values are not changed. 2. The B Ethernet interface can be used with single-slot EDCMs or E5-ENET cards. 3.

  • Page 221: Changing The Link Value Of A M2Pa Association To Another Link Value On The Same Iplimx Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Link Value of a M2PA Association to another Link Value on the Same IPLIMx Card This procedure is used to change the link value of an M2PA association, assigned to cards that are running the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications (IPLIMx cards), to another link value that is assigned to the same IPLIMx card that is hosting the M2PA association.
  • Page 222 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered. To enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx> command, the terminal must allow Security Administration commands to be entered from it and the user must be allowed to enter Security Administration commands.
  • Page 223 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 4. Perform one of these actions. If the new link value is not shown in the rtrv-card output in Step 2, perform the Adding an IPLIMx Signaling Link procedure to provision the signaling link with the card location specified Step 2 and the new link value.
  • Page 224 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 ANAME assoc2 1205 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST IPNODE2-1205 ALHOST RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 2048 RPORT 3000 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES...
  • Page 225 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-07 11:11:28 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Activate Link message sent to card 12. Verify the status of the signaling link using the rept-stat-slk command. For example, enter this command.
  • Page 226 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: :loc = <the location of the card containing the association that will be changed, shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...
  • Page 227 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Is the new Is the new link value shown in the link value shown in the rtrv-card output for the card that is rtrv-assoc output for the card that hosting the association that is is hosting the association that being changed?
  • Page 228 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Enter the chg-assoc command with these parameters: Was the value of :aname=<name of the association being the open parameter changed> changed on Sheet 1? :link=<the new link value for the assoication>...

  • Page 229: Figure 38: Changing The Link Value Of A M2Pa Association To Another Link Value On The Same Iplimx Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Do you wish Perform the Changing the to change the LHOST or Host Values of an M2PA ALHOST values of the Association” procedure in this M2PA association ? chapter.

  • Page 230: Configuring Sctp Retransmission Control For A M2Pa Association

    The RFC 2960 standard for congestion control is also used. lin – Tekelec's linear retransmission mode where each retransmission timeout value is the same as the initial transmission timeout and only the slow start algorithm is used for congestion control.
  • Page 231 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Because the rtrv-assoc command used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped. There are three ways that the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled.
  • Page 232 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PING command in progress rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PING GW100. NC. TEKELEC. COM (192.1.1.30): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=0. time=5. ms 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=1. time=9. ms 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=2.
  • Page 233 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway ASSOCRTT: Association round-trip time report (in milliseconds) Retransmission Configuration Retransmission Mode : LIN Minimum RTO: 120 Maximum RTO: 800 Traffic Round-Trip Times Minimum round-trip time Maximum round-trip time : 120 Weighted Average round-trip time : 10 Last recorded round-trip time : 10...
  • Page 234 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880 My Rwnd = 16384 Max Window = 16384 Initial Seq Number = 24130 Next Sending Seq Number = 124686 Last Acked Seq Number = 124669...
  • Page 235 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Nets Data IP Address 192.168.112.4 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.113.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880...

  • Page 236: Figure 39: Configuring The Sctp Retransmission Control For A M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway parameters. If the retransmission parameters do not have to be adjusted, do not perform this step. This procedure is finished. Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter. Enter the rtrv-assoc :loc = <the location of the card command.

  • Page 237: Changing A M2Pa Timer Set

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing a M2PA Timer Set This procedure is used to change the values of the M2PA timers in a M2PA timer set using the chg-m2pa-tset command. The M2PA timers are used to control the behavior of the signaling link assigned to an M2PA association (an association containing the M2PA adapter layer - adapter=m2pa) during signaling link alignment and proving, and during times of transmit congestion.
  • Page 238 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Timer Draft 6 Definition Value (in DRAFT 6 RFC System Timer Timer msecs) System Default Name Name Default Value (in Value (in msecs) msecs) The amount of time the M2PA 1000 - Alignment adapter layer waits to receive...
  • Page 239 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Timer Draft 6 Definition Value (in DRAFT 6 RFC System Timer Timer msecs) System Default Name Name Default Value (in Value (in msecs) msecs) The amount of time that a Remote Congestion 1000 - congested link will remain in...
  • Page 240 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway M2PA Draft 6 Timers (in msec, T16 in microsec) TSET T1 6000 ------ 5000 20000 500 5000 3000 1000 200000 250 1000 10000 ------ 10000 10000 500 1000 3000 1200 200000 250 1000 10000...
  • Page 241 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 10000 ------ 10000 10000 500 1000 3000 1200 200000 250 1000 10000 ------ 10000 10000 500 1000 3000 1200 200000 250 1000 10000 ------ 10000 10000 500 1000 3000 1200 200000 250 1000 10000...
  • Page 242 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-m2pa-tset:tset=1:srctset=9:ver=rfc To copy the Draft 6 version of timer set 9 to timer set 1, enter this command. chg-m2pa-tset:tset=1:srctset=9:ver=d6 Note: The ver parameter is optional and does not have to be specified to change the M2PA RFC timer values.

  • Page 243: Figure 40: Changing An M2Pa Timer Set

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rtrv-m2pa-tset command with one of these parameters:...

  • Page 244: Changing The Sctp Checksum Algorithm Option For M2Pa Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for M2PA Associations Use this procedure to change the SCTP checksum algorithm, either Adler-32 or CRC-32c, applied to traffic on SCTP associations. The sctpcsum parameter of the chg-sg-opts command is used to change this option.
  • Page 245 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1. Display the current IP options in the database by entering the rtrv-sg-opts command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 SCTPCSUM: adler32 The rtrv-sg-opts command output contains other fields that are not used by this procedure.
  • Page 246 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway applications. After the Configuring an IP Card procedure has been performed, continue the procedure with Step 4. Verify that the SCTP checksum algorithm was changed using the rtrv-sg-opts command. The SCTP checksum algorithm option value is shown in the SCTPCSUM parameter.
  • Page 247 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway 192.1.1.14 IPNODE1-1205 192.1.1.20 IPNODE2-1201 192.1.1.22 IPNODE2-1203 192.1.1.24 IPNODE2-1205 192.1.1.32 KC-HLR2 192.1.1.50 DN-MSC1 192.1.1.52 DN-MSC2 REMOTE IPADDR REMOTE HOST 150.1.1.5 NCDEPTECONOMIC_DEVELOPMENT. SOUTHEASTERN_COORIDOR_ASHVL. GOV IP Host table is (10 of 2048) 1% full 8.
  • Page 248 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 11. Verify the checksum algorithm that is assigned to the associations shown in Step 10 by entering the sctp -a pass command with the card location of the IP card specified in...
  • Page 249 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway dup tsns rcvd = 8 sacks rcvd = 38734 gap ack blocks rcvd = 3 heartbeat requests rcvd = 135 heartbeat acks rcvd = 52 heartbeat requests sent = 52 ip datagrams sent = 129254 ip datagrams with data chunks sent = 73084 data chunks sent = 396330...
  • Page 250 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Initial Seq Number = 24130 Next Sending Seq Number = 124686 Last Acked Seq Number = 124669 Maximum Outbound Char Count = 16384 Current Outbound Char Count = 2112 Number Unsent Char Count = 0 Outbound Data Chunk Count = 16 Number Unsent = 0...
  • Page 251 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Nets Data IP Address 192.168.112.4 State Reachable Port 1025 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.112.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880...
  • Page 252 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway SCTP command complete rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 Aname Local Local Primary Remote IP Address Port Address Port assoc4 192.1.1.24 3290 192.168.112.4 1025 192.1.1.24 Configuration State Retransmission Mode = LIN State = OPEN Min.
  • Page 253 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway retransmit timer count = 0 consecutive retransmit timeouts = 0 RTT between RMIN and RMAX inclusive = 6 RTT greater than RMAX = 0 fast retransmit count = 135 recv timer count = 0 heartbeat timer count = 244 none left tosend = 0...
  • Page 254 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Number To Retransmit = 0 ip datagrams rcvd = 155402 ip datagrams with data chunks rcvd = 120844 data chunks rcvd = 367908 data chunks read = 367900 dup tsns rcvd = 8 sacks rcvd = 38734 gap ack blocks rcvd = 3 heartbeat requests rcvd = 135...
  • Page 255 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880 My Rwnd = 16384 Max Window = 16384 Initial Seq Number = 24130 Next Sending Seq Number = 124686 Last Acked Seq Number = 124669...
  • Page 256 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway act-slk:loc=1308:link=b act-slk:loc=1308:link=b2 When these commands have successfully completed, this message appears. rlghncxa03w 06-10-07 11:11:28 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Activate Link message sent to card 13. Verify the in-service normal (IS-NR) status of the signaling link by using the rept-stat-slk command and specifying the card location and link values specified in Step For example, enter these commands.
  • Page 257 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway user messages reassembled......0 data chunks read......... 988601 duplicate tsns received......0 sacks received........153763 gap ack blocks received......0 out of the blue........4 with invalid checksum......0 connections established......
  • Page 258 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-sg-opts command Enter the rtrv-card command. Record the card locations and signaling link information for all cards running the IPLIM and IPLIMI applications. What will the Enter the PERCARD new sctpcsum value chg-sg-opts:sctpcsum=percard...
  • Page 259 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter: :lhost = <the local host name (from the rtrv-ip-host output) whose IP address is associated with the card location of each signaling link (from the rtrv-ip-lnk output) specified in the dact-slk command>...

  • Page 260: Figure 41: Changing The Sctp Checksum Algorithm Option For M2Pa Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Enter the rept-stat-slk command with these parameters: Enter the pass:loc=<card location :loc = <location of the card specified in the specified in the rept-stat-slk act-slk command> command>:cmd="netstat -p sctp"...

  • Page 261: Turning Off The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Turning Off the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Feature This procedure is used to turn off the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature, using the chg-ctrl-feat command. The chg-ctrl-feat command uses these parameters: :partnum –...
  • Page 262 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Feature Name Partnum Status Quantity Large MSU for IP Sig 893018401 ---- The following features have been temporarily enabled: Feature Name Partnum Status Quantity Trial Period Left Zero entries found. The following features have expired temporary keys: Feature Name Partnum...

  • Page 263: Figure 42: Turning Off The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ctrl-feat command with this parameter: :partnum=893018401 This procedure cannot be Is the Large MSU perfomed. To turn the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Support for IP Signaling feature off, feature enabled the Large MSU Support for IP and turned on?

  • Page 264: Chapter 4: Ietf M3Ua And Sua Configuration Procedures

    Chapter IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Topics: Chapter 4, IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures, describes the procedures necessary to Adding IETF M3UA and SUA Components...266 configure the components necessary to establish IP Adding an IPGWx Card..267 connections using M3UA or SUA associations on IPGWx signaling links.
  • Page 265 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing a M3UA or SUA Association..486 Removing an Association from an Application Server..490 Removing a Routing Key Containing an Application Server..497 Removing a Network Appearance..506 Changing IETF M3UA and SUA Components..508 Changing IP Options..508 Changing the Attributes of a M3UA or SUA...

  • Page 266: Adding Ietf M3Ua And Sua Components

    Note: Before turning on the ISUP-over-IP feature (ipisup) feature, make sure you have purchased these features. If you are not sure whether you have purchased the ISUP-over-IP feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. Once a feature has been turned on with the chg-feat command, the feature cannot be turned off.

  • Page 267: Adding An Ipgwx Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway an M2PA Association procedure in IETF M2PA Configuration Procedures. Associations can be assigned to IPSG signaling links also. These associations are configured by performing the Adding an IPSG M2PA Association Adding an IPSG M3UA Association procedures.

  • Page 268: Table 21: Ipgwx Card Types

    Note: Before turning on the ISUP-over-IP feature (ipisup), make sure you have purchased this feature. If you are not sure whether you have purchased the ISUP-over-IP feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. Once a feature has been turned on with the chg-feat command, the feature cannot be turned off.
  • Page 269 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1102 1113 GSPM EOAM 1114 TDM-A 1115 GSPM EOAM 1116 TDM-B 1117 MDAL 1201 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1203 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1204 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1206 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI nsp3 nsp4 1216 STPLAN 1301...
  • Page 270 Note: The ISUP-over-IP feature must be purchased before turning them on. If you are not sure whether you have purchased the ISUP-over-IP feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear.
  • Page 271 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the card being added in this procedure is not an E5-ENET card, continue the procedure with Step If the card being added in this procedure is an E5-ENET card, continue the procedure with Step 7.
  • Page 272 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If HIPR or HIPR2 cards are not installed on the shelf containing the E5-ENET card, go to the Installation Manual - EAGLE 5 ISS and install the HIPR or HIPR2 cards. Once the HIPR or HIPR2 cards have been installed, continue the procedure with Step 9.
  • Page 273 Otherwise, this procedure is finished. Note: Before executing this procedure, make sure you have purchased the ISUP-over-IP feature. If you are not sure whether you have purchased the ISUP-over-IP feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...
  • Page 274 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command. Note: See the Card Slot Selection section in the Adding an IPGWx Card” procedure in the Database Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway. Are the required Enter the rtrv-shlf unprovisioned card slots command.
  • Page 275 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the From Enter the rtrv-feat Is the IPISUP ISUP-over-IP feature Sheet 1 command. feature on? to be used? Enter the chg-feat:ipisup=on command. Is the IP card being provisioned To Sheet in this procedure an E5-ENET card?

  • Page 276: Configuring An Ipgwx Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Which application IPGWI From is being assigned to the Sheet 2 card ? SS 7IPGW Enter the ent -card command with these mandatory parameters :loc=<card location > :type =dcm :appl =ss 7ipgw Enter the...
  • Page 277 If you are not sure if you have purchased the IP Gateway ISUP routing feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. :iptps – The quantity of IP TPS (transactions per second) that is assigned to the IPGWx linkset, from 100 to 32,000.

  • Page 278: Table 22: Signaling Link Fair Share Example

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This threshold is reached when the signaling link’s actual usage exceeds the percentage of the signaling link’s fair share of the linkset’s IPTPS or the percentage of the IPGWx card’s capacity. A signaling link's fair share of linkset’s IPTPS is the linkset’s IPTPS divided by the number of in-service links in the linkset.
  • Page 279 If you are not sure if you have purchased the ITU duplicate point code feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. Adding the IPGWx linkset cannot exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS shown in the rtrv-tps output.
  • Page 280 The IP Gateway ISUP routing feature must be purchased before you turn the feature on with the chg-feat command. If you are not sure if you have purchased the IP Gateway ISUP routing feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. Other Optional Parameters There are other optional parameters that can be used to configure an IPGWx linkset.
  • Page 281 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-10 16:20:46 GMT EAGLE 42.0.0 CARD RSVD TYPE CARDS LINKS ----- ----- ----- -------- -------- IPGW 48000 80000 IPSG 4200 8000...
  • Page 282 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway LINK LSN SLC TYPE SET BPS TSEL CRC4 SI SN 1306 A lsnituatm LIME1ATM 21 2.048M LINE SLK table is (30 of 1200) 2% full. If ATM high-speed signaling links are shown in the rtrv-slk output, perform the "Removing an SS7 Signaling Link"...
  • Page 283 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If you do not wish to perform other actions to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will Step allow the IPGWx linkset to be added, continue the procedure with 4.
  • Page 284 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipgwx1 001-001-002 none 1 off off off no SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- ----------- RANDSLS IPSG IPGWAPC...
  • Page 285 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipgwx3 001-001-004 none 1...
  • Page 286 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipsglsn2 005-005-005 none 1 off off off no SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- -----------...
  • Page 287 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway To change the MAXSLKTPS value (and RSVDSLKTPS value if necessary) for any linksets shown in the rtrv-ls output, perform the Changing an IPSG M2PA Linkset procedure (for linkset Changing an IPSG M3UA Linkset whose IPSG value is yes and ADAPTER value is M2PA) or the procedure (for linkset whose IPSG value is yes and ADAPTER value is M3UA).
  • Page 288 The ITU Duplicate Point Code and Multiple Point Code features must be purchased before you turn either of these features on with the chg-feat command. If you are not sure if you have purchased these features, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear.
  • Page 289 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If a new linkset is being added, continue the procedure with Step If an existing linkset is being changed and the APC of the linkset is being changed, continue the procedure with Step If an existing linkset is being changed and the APC of the linkset is not being changed, continue...
  • Page 290 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-ls:lsn=lsn3:sapcn=12115-uk:action=delete When the chg-ls command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-17 16:23:21 GMT EAGLE5 37.5.0 Link set table is ( 13 of 255) 5% full CHG-LS: MASP A - COMPLTD Continue the procedure by performing one of these steps.
  • Page 291 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1-011-1 ----------- no --- -------------- -------------- 1-011-2 ----------- no --- -------------- -------------- Destination table is (14 of 2000) 1% full Alias table is (0 of 12000) 0% full If the new adjacent point code is not shown in the rtrv-dstn output, perform the "Adding a Destination Point Code"...
  • Page 292 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 37.5.0 DPCA RTX-CRITERIA 010-020-005 OPCA 007-008-009 ls1305 001-005-000 008-008-008 ls1307 001-007-000 DESTINATION ENTRIES ALLOCATED: 2000 FULL DPC(s): EXCEPTION DPC(s):...
  • Page 293 The IP Gateway ISUP routing feature must be purchased before you turn the feature on with the chg-feat command. If you are not sure if you have purchased the IP Gateway ISUP routing feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...
  • Page 294 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 37.5.0 CHG-FEAT: MASP A - COMPLTD 19. Add the new linkset to the database using the ent-ls command. The new linkset must meet these conditions.
  • Page 295 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is ( 14 of 1024) 1% full ENT-LS: MASP A - COMPLTD Continue the procedure with Step 20. Change the existing linkset by entering the chg-ls command. The name of the linkset that is being changed, specified with the lsn parameter, must be specified.
  • Page 296 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is ( 14 of 1024) 1% full rtrv-ls:lsn=lsgw1107 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-17 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7)
  • Page 297 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: The maximum total Enter the rtrv-tps provisioned system TPS command. cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS. Will What is configuring the IPGWx the maximum total 750,000 linkset exceed the maximum provisioned system TPS total provisioned system...
  • Page 298 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 1 cannot be performed. or 3 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 3 perform? Remove ATM...
  • Page 299 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any linksets shown in From Enter the rept-stat-iptps the rept-stat-iptps Sheet 2 command. output, other than the linkset that is being changed? Note: If an existing See the Note.
  • Page 300 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the MULTGC From Is a new parameter to be specified Sheets 1, linkset being for the linkset? (See Notes 2, or 3 added? 1 and 2) Sheet 5 What value will the MULTGC parameter be...
  • Page 301 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 4 The APC of this Is a new linkset cannot be linkset being shown in the rtrv-ls added? output. Does the Will the linkset have APC of the linkset ITU-N SAPCs be changed (See...
  • Page 302 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-dstn command with this What is the PRX From parameter. parameter value shown in Sheet 5 :dpc/dpca/dpci/dpcn/ the previous step? dpcn24=<APC value for the linkset being added> This point code cannot be used as the APC of this linkset.

  • Page 303: Figure 44: Configuring An Ipgwx Linkset

    IPGWx Linkset” procedure in the Database These optional parameters can also be specified to Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway for change the linkset and signaling link alarm the procedures that discuss these parameters and thresholds, and the multgc parameter value.

  • Page 304: Adding A Mate Ipgwx Linkset To Another Ipgwx Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding a Mate IPGWx Linkset to another IPGWx Linkset This procedure is used to add a mate IPGWx linkset to an existing IPGWx linkset chg-ls command with these parameters. :lsn –...
  • Page 305 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway These procedures in this manual: Configuring an IPGWx Linkset Removing a Mate IPGWx Linkset from another IPGWx Linkset Adding an IPSG M3UA Linkset Adding an IPSG M2PA Linkset Changing an IPSG M3UA Linkset Changing an IPSG M2PA Linkset These procedures in the Database Administration Manual - SS7...
  • Page 306 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway IPGWAPC MATELSN IPTPS LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM GTTMODE ---------- 10000 70 % 70 % CdPA LINK SLC TYPE 1103 A SS7IPGW Link set table is ( 14 of 1024) 1% full To assign a mate IPGWx linkset to this linkset, this linkset cannot contain more than one signaling link.
  • Page 307 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ----------- IPGWAPC MATELSN IPTPS LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM GTTMODE ---------- 10000 70 % 70 % CdPA LINK SLC TYPE 1107 A SS7IPGW Link set table is ( 14 of 1024) 1% full 4.
  • Page 308 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CLLI 1103,A lsgw1103 ----------- IS-NR Avail ----- ALARM STATUS = No Alarms. UNAVAIL REASON = NA Command Completed.
  • Page 309 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway ANAME PORT LINK ADAPTER LPORT RPORT OPEN ALW assoc2 1103 A M3UA 1030 1030 IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (4 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (16 KB of 3200 KB) on LOC = 1103 10.
  • Page 310 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 14. Change the linkset shown in Step 2 by entering the chg-ls command with the matelsn and action=add parameters. For this example, enter this command. chg-ls:lsn=lsgw1103:matelsn=lsgw1107:action=add When the chg-ls command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-17 16:23:21 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 Link set table is ( 14 of 1024)
  • Page 311 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-assoc:aname=assoc1:open=yes:alw=yes When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD 19. Have the far-end node for the signaling link shown in Step 15 place the IP connections on the signaling link into service by placing the M3UAor SUA associations in the ASP-ACTIVE state.
  • Page 312 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rept-stat-iptps command Are any entries displayed?
  • Page 313 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter: :lsn=<LSN shown in the rept-stat-iptps output> Does the linkset Choose another being changed have linkset from the more than one signaling rept-stat-iptps output link?
  • Page 314 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Enter the rtrv-ls command Choose another with this parameter: linkset from the :lsn=<mate LSN shown in the rept-stat-iptps output rept-stat-iptps output> Perform the Do you Does the APC Configuring an wish to use another...
  • Page 315 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is a signaling link assigned to the IPGWx From linkset, shown in the rtrv-ls Sheets 2 output on Sheet 2, that the mate or 3 IPGWx Linkset is being added to? Enter the rept-stat-card command with this parameter:...
  • Page 316 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are the IP connections on the IPGWx signaling link to be placed out of service by the far end From node for the IPGWx signaling link? Sheet 4 Note: This is the recommended method for placing the IP connections out of service.

  • Page 317: Figure 45: Adding A Mate Ipgwx Linkset To Another Ipgwx Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the dact-slk command with Enter the inh-card command these parameters: From with this parameter: :loc=<the card location used in the Sheet 5 :loc=<the card location used rept-stat-slk command on Sheet 4>...

  • Page 318: Adding An Ipgwx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IPGWx Signaling Link This procedure is used to add an IPGWx signaling link to the database using the ent-slk command with these parameters: :loc – The card location of the IP card that the IP signaling link will be assigned to. The cards specified by this parameter are IP cards running the SS7IPGW or IPGWI applications.
  • Page 319 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Canceling the REPT-STAT-SLK, RTRV-LS, and RTRV-SLK Commands Because the rept-stat-slk, rtrv-ls, and rtrv-slk commands used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rept-stat-slk, rtrv-ls, and rtrv-slk commands can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped.
  • Page 320 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway SLK table is (4 of 1200) 1% full. 3. Display the current linkset configuration using the rtrv-ls command. This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA...
  • Page 321 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1200-zz Link set table is (13 of 1024) 1% full. Linksets containing IPGWx signaling links can contain only IPGWx signaling links. 5. Display the cards in the database using the rtrv-card command. This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 322 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If you wish to assign more than one IPGWx signaling link to an IPGWx linkset that has a mate Removing a Mate IPGWx linkset assigned, the mate to this linkset must be removed. Perform the Linkset from another IPGWx Linkset procedure and remove the mate linkset from the linkset you wish to assign the IPGWx signaling link to.

  • Page 323: Table 23: Ipgwx Signaling Link Parameter Combinations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is ( 14 of 1024) 1% full If the name of the linkset you wish to use is not shown in the MATELSN field of the rtrv-ls output, repeat this step until all the IPGWx linksets have been displayed, or until a linkset has been found that has the linkset you wish to use assigned as a mate.
  • Page 324 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway When each of these commands have successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-07 08:29:03 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 ENT-SLK: MASP A - COMPLTD Note: If adding the new signaling link will result in more than 700 signaling links in the database and the OAMHCMEAS value in the rtrv-measopts output is on, the scheduled UI measurement reports will be disabled.
  • Page 325 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway rept-stat-slk:loc=2207:link=a This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 07-05-23 13:06:25 GMT EAGLE5 37.0.0 CLLI 2207,A lsnlp3 ----------- IS-NR Avail ---- ALARM STATUS UNAVAIL REASON rept-stat-slk:loc=2211:link=a This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 326 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-tbl-capacity command Will the addition of the signaling link exceed the maximum number of signaling links the EAGLE 5 ISS can have? What is the 2800 maximum number of signaling links the EAGLE 5 ISS can...
  • Page 327 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the linkset that the signaling link will be assigned to contains, or will contain, the From multgc=yes parameter, the card containing the Sheets 1 signaling link must have the IPGWI application or 4 assigned to it.
  • Page 328 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Does the linkset contain any IPGWx signaling links? Sheet 4 (see Note 1) What is the value of the IPGWAPC parameter? Does the linkset contain any other signaling links? Sheet 6 (See Note 2)
  • Page 329 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Does the linkset have a mate IPGWx linkset assigned? Sheet 5 (See the Notes) Perform the "Removing a Mate Do you IPGWx Linkset from another wish to use this IPGWx Linkset"...
  • Page 330 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 4 Enter the rept-stat-iptps command Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter: :lsn=<the linkset name shown in the rept-stat-iptps output> This step is performed to verify if the linkset that the signaling link will be assigned to is the mate of another IPGWx linkset.

  • Page 331: Figure 46: Adding An Ipgwx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 3 or 5 Enter the ent-slk command. Use the IPGWx Signaling Link Parameter Combinations table in the Adding an IPGWx Signaling Link” procedure Enter the rtrv-slk command with these in the Database Administration Manual - IP7 parameters for each signaling link added Secure Gateway as a guide to determine which...

  • Page 332: Configuring An Ip Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Configuring an IP Link This procedure is used to configure the link parameters for IP cards using the chg-ip-lnk command. These link parameters are used to configure the Ethernet hardware. The chg-ip-lnk command uses the following parameters.

  • Page 333: Table 24: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The IP address and subnet mask values cannot be changed to an address representing a different network if: If the network interface specified by the loc and port parameters has a default router, dnsa, or dsnb parameter values assigned to it, as shown in the rtrv-ip-card output.
  • Page 334 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Network Class IP Network Address Range Valid Subnet Mask Values 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 If a Class B IP address is specified for the ipaddr parameter of the chg-ip-lnk command, the subnet address that results from the ipaddr and submask parameter values cannot be the same as the subnet address that results from the pvn and pvnmask , fcna and fcnamask, or fcnb and fcnbmask parameter values of the chg-netopts command.
  • Page 335 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2105 --------------- --------------- HALF 2205 192.1.1.30 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF 2213 192.1.1.50 255.255.255.0 FULL 2213 --------------- --------------- HALF 2301 192.1.1.52 255.255.255.0...
  • Page 336 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway For example, enter this command. rept-stat-slk:loc=1201:link=a The output lists the signaling link assigned to this card: rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 1201,A nc001 ----------- IS-NR Command Completed.
  • Page 337 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway IS-NR nc001 ----------- Command Completed. Step 8 If the IP card to be inhibited is in service-normal (IS-NR), continue the procedure with inhibit the card. If the IP card is out-of-service-maintenance disabled (OOS-MT-DSBLD), continue the procedure with Step 10 to change the IP link parameters.
  • Page 338 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway BPSUBMASK --------------- If the rtrv-ip-card output shows an IP address for the default router (DEFROUTER) whose network portion matches the network portion of the IP address being changed, go to the Configuring an IP Card procedure and change the IP address of the default router to 0.0.0.0.
  • Page 339 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:lhost="ipnode-1201" This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT LINK ADAPTER LPORT RPORT OPEN ALW swbel32 1201 A M3UA...
  • Page 340 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway For example, enter this command. rept-stat-card:loc=1201 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD VERSION TYPE 1201 114-000-000 SS7IPGW IS-NR Active ----- ALARM STATUS...
  • Page 341 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 22. Perform one of these procedures as necessary and change the value of the open parameter of the association to yes. Note: If the open parameter value for an association was not changed in Step 13, continue the procedure with...
  • Page 342 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk command Is the ipaddr=0.0.0.0 parameter to be specified with the chg-ip-lnk command? Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter. :display=all Is the current IP address of the IP link shown in the rtrv-ip-host output?
  • Page 343 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Is the state of the signaling link OOS-MT-DSBLD? Enter the dact-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card Enter the location of the signaling link>...
  • Page 344 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Are the ipaddr or submask paramter values being Sheet 6 changed? Enter the rtrv-ip-card command with the loc value of the IP link being changed Is the IP address being changed to a Sheet 4...
  • Page 345 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Does the defrouter parameter have a value assigned? Does the network portion of the defrouter parameter match the network portion of the IP address not being changed or the new IP address? Enter the...
  • Page 346 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 3 or 4 Is a Class B IP address to be specified for the new IP address of the IP link? Enter the rtrv-netopts command Is error message E3967 displayed? Choose values for the ipaddr and...
  • Page 347 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Was a local From host removed on Sheet 1 Sheets 3 with the "Removing an IP or 5 Host" procedure? Enter the rtrv-assoc command with the lhost value shown in the rtrv-ip-host output from Sheet 1 Does the rtrv-assoc output show...
  • Page 348 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 6 Enter the chg-ip-lnk command with these mandatory parameters: :loc=<card location of the link> :port=<the ethernet interface on the card, A or B> and with at least one of these optional parameters: :ipaddr = <IP address>...
  • Page 349 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 7 Was the state of the signaling link changed on Sheet 2? Enter the act-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card Were the ipaddr or...
  • Page 350 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 8 Was an IP route removed on Sheets 3 or 4? Perform the "Adding an IP Route" procedure and add the IP route back to the database Was the open parameter value changed for...

  • Page 351: Adding An Ip Host

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IP Host This procedure associates hostnames with IP addresses using the ent-ip-host command. The ent-ip-host command uses the following parameters. :host– The host name to be associated with the IP address. This parameter identifies the logical name assigned to the device with the IP address indicated.
  • Page 352 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2101 192.1.1.20 255.255.255.0 FULL 2101 --------------- --------------- HALF 2103 192.1.1.22 255.255.255.0 FULL 2103 --------------- --------------- HALF 2105 192.1.1.24 255.255.255.0 FULL 2105 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF...

  • Page 353: Figure 48: Adding An Ip Host

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter.

  • Page 354: Configuring An Ip Card

    IP addresses consist of the system’s network number and the machine’s unique host number. :domain – The domain name is used to construct a fully-qualified DNS name consisting of 120 characters or less. For example, a domain name can be tekelec.com, the hostname is john.doe. The fully-qualified DNS name would be john.doe@tekelec.com.
  • Page 355 --------------- SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1203 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1205 SRCHORDR SRVRONLY DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM...
  • Page 356 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- To change the parameters of an IP card, the signaling link to the card and the card have to be inhibited. 2. Display the signaling link associated with the card shown in Step 1 using the rtrv-slk command specifying the card location.
  • Page 357 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The output displays the link status as OOS-MT-DSBLD and gives off a minor alarm: rlghncxa03w 06-10-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 1201,A nc001 ----------- OOS-MT-DSBLD AVAIL ALARM STATUS = * 0236 REPT-LKS:not aligned UNAVAIL REASON = NA Command Completed.
  • Page 358 Verify the sctpcsum parameter value by entering the rtrv-sg-opts command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-13 09:19:43 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 SRKQ: 1500 SNMPCONT: tekelec GETCOMM: public SETCOMM: private TRAPCOMM: public...
  • Page 359 08-06-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 39.0.0 LOC 1201 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM adler32 BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- Note: If Step 7 Step was not performed, continue the procedure with 13. Allow the IP card that was inhibited in Step 7 by using the alw-card command.
  • Page 360 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway rept-stat-card:loc=1201 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD VERSION TYPE 1201 114-000-000 SS7IPGW IS-NR Active ----- ALARM STATUS = No Alarms. BPDCM GPL = 002-102-000 IMT BUS A...
  • Page 361 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ip-card command Enter the rtrv-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link from rtrv-ip-card output> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card>...
  • Page 362 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Is the state of From rept-stat-card:loc=<card the card Sheet 1 location> command OOS-MT-DSBLD? Enter the Enter the rept-stat-card:loc=<card inh-card:loc=<card location> command location> command Is the defrouter parameter to be specified with the chg-ip-card command?
  • Page 363 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Will the sctpcsum parameter value be changed? Enter the rtrv-sg-opts command What is the current value of the PERCARD sctpcsum parameter shown in the rtrv-sg-opts output? ADLER32, CRC32C...

  • Page 364: Figure 49: Configuring An Ip Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Enter the Notes: chg-ip-card:loc=<card location> command 1. Either the domain or rstdomain parameters can with at least one of these parameters: be specified, but not both. :srchordr = <local, srvr, srvronly>...

  • Page 365: Adding An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IP Route This procedure is used to add an IP route to the database using the ent-ip-rte command. The ent-ip-rte command uses these parameters. :loc – The location of the IP card that the IP route will be assigned to. :dest –...

  • Page 366: Table 26: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Table 26: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values Network Class IP Network Address Range Valid Subnet Mask Values 255.0.0.0 (the default value for a class A IP address) 255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0...
  • Page 367 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-08-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 39.0.0 LOC 1212 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 150.1.1.1 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER 150.1.1.100 DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1301 SRCHORDR SRVRONLY DNSA 140.188.13.10 DNSB 140.190.15.28...
  • Page 368 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Display the pvn, pvnmask, fcna, fcnamask, fcnb, and fcnbmask parameter values of the chg-netopts command by entering the rtrv-netopts command. If error message E3967 Cmd Rej: E5IS must be on is displayed after the rtrv-netopts command is executed, the pvn, pvnmask, fcna, fcnamask, fcnb, and fcnbmask parameters are not configured.
  • Page 369 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Enter the rtrv-ip-rte command rtrv-ip-card command Perform the "Adding an IPGWx Card" procedure in Is the required this chapter to add the IP card in the required IP card to the database? database...

  • Page 370: Figure 50: Adding An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the ent-ip-rte command with these parameters: :loc=<IP card location> :dest = <IP address of the remote host or network> :submask = <subnet mask of the destination IP address>...

  • Page 371: Adding An M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an M3UA or SUA Association This procedure is used to configure M3UA or SUA associations using the ent-assoc command. The combination of a local host, local SCTP port, remote host and remote SCTP port defines an association. M3UA and SUA associations are assigned to cards running either the SS7IPGW or IPGWI applications (IPGWx cards).
  • Page 372 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway the ent-assoc command. To provision an alternate remote host for an M3UA or SUA association, perform Changing the Attributes of a M3UA or SUA Association. The size of the buffers on the single-slot EDCMs and E5-ENET cards are shown in the following list. Single-Slot EDCM - 800 KB E5-ENET Card - 3200 KB The size of the buffers assigned to each association that is assigned to the IP card cannot exceed the...
  • Page 373 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Because the rtrv-assoc command used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped. There are three ways that the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled.
  • Page 374 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If you do not wish to use this card to configure an M3UA association, perform one of these actions. Choose another card from the rtrv-assoc output in Step 1 and repeat this step.
  • Page 375 Changing the Buffer Size of a M3UA or SUA Association procedure. 6. Add the associations using the ent-assoc command. For this example, enter these commands. ent-assoc:aname=assoc1:lhost=gw105.nc.tekelec.com:lport=1030: rhost=gw100.nc.tekelec.com:rport=1030:adapter=m3ua:link=a These are the rules that apply to adding M3UA or SUA associations that are assigned to IPGWx signaling links.
  • Page 376 7. For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1305 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE...
  • Page 377 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: The IP link is shown by the entries Enter the in the CARD LOC and IPLINK PORT rtrv-assoc command columns. The ADAPTER value of the association must be M3UA or SUA. Is the required IP link shown in the rtrv-assoc output? (See...
  • Page 378 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Notes: From 1. The IP address of the IP link should be assigned Sheet 1 to the host name, shown in the rtrv-ip-host output, that will be assigned to the association. 2.
  • Page 379 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 1 or 2 Was a new host name added on Sheet 2? Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter: :lhost=<local host name that will be assigned to the new association>...

  • Page 380: Figure 51: Adding An Ipgwx M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Enter the ent-assoc command with these mandatory parameters: :aname=<association name> :lhost = <local host name from the rtrv-ip-host output> and with at least one of these optional parameters: Is the association :lport = <local port ID>...

  • Page 381: Adding A New Association To A New Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding a New Association to a New Application Server This procedure is used create a new application server and assign a new association to the application server using the ent-as command. The ent-as command uses these parameters: :asname –...
  • Page 382 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway M2PA associations (adapter=m2pa) cannot be assigned to application servers. Only M3UA (adapter=m3ua) and SUA (adapter=sua) associations can be assigned to application servers. This can be verified in the ADAPTER field in the rtrv-assoc output. The application server recovery timer (the tr parameter of the chg-as command) for the application server is set by default to 10 milliseconds when an application server is added.
  • Page 383 3. Display the IP host names in the database by using the rtrv-ip-host:display=all command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-12-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 40.0.0 LOCAL IPADDR LOCAL HOST 192.1.1.10 IPNODE1-1201 192.1.1.12 GW105. NC. TEKELEC. COM 192.1.1.14 IPNODE1-1205 192.1.1.20 IPNODE2-1201 192.1.1.22 IPNODE2-1203 192.1.1.24 IPNODE2-1205 192.1.1.30...
  • Page 384 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway rtrv-card:loc=1205 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-03-06 15:17:20 EST EAGLE5 38.0.0 CARD TYPE APPL LSET NAME LINK SLC LSET NAME LINK SLC 1205 SS7IPGW lsn1 If the application assigned to the card is SS7IPGW or IPGWI, shown in the APPL column, continue the procedure with...
  • Page 385 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the number of SCTP association to application server assignments is 50, the local host value cannot be used in this procedure. Repeat this procedure from Step 3 and select another local IP host from the rtrv-ip-host output or perform the Adding an IP Host...
  • Page 386 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway AS table is (4 of 250) 1% full. Note: If you do not wish to change theopen parameter value of the association specified inStep continue the procedure withStep 11.
  • Page 387 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-as command Enter the rtrv-assoc From command Sheet 2 Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter. :display=all Is the IP host for the new association Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk shown in the rtrv-ip-host command...
  • Page 388 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Note: An association can be assigned to more than one application server. Enter the Each association and application server combination rtrv-assoc command with this is referred to as an association - application server parameter: assignment.

  • Page 389: Figure 52: Adding A New Association To A New Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Notes: Sheets 1 1. M2PA associations cannot be assigned to an application or 2 server. 2. If the application server is being added in this procedure will be assigned to a routing key containing a rcontext parameter value, the adapter parameter value for the Perform the Adding an M3UA or...

  • Page 390: Adding An Existing Association To A New Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an Existing Association to a New Application Server This procedure is used create a new application server and assign an existing association to the application server using the ent-as command. The ent-as command uses these parameters: :asname –...
  • Page 391 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway M2PA associations (adapter=m2pa) cannot be assigned to application servers. Only M3UA (adapter=m3ua) and SUA (adapter=sua) associations can be assigned to application servers. This can be verified in the ADAPTER field in the rtrv-assoc output. The application server recovery timer (the tr parameter of the chg-as command) for the application server is set by default to 10 milliseconds when an application server is added.
  • Page 392 IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1305 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER SUA RFC LHOST gw102.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 4000 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS...
  • Page 393 IP Appl Sock table is (6 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (16 KB of 800 KB) on LOC = 1305 ANAME a3 1307 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER SUA RFC LHOST gw103.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw106.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 3000 RPORT 2346...
  • Page 394 5. Display the associations assigned to the local IP host value specified in Step 2 Step 3 by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the lhost parameter. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:lhost=gw102.nc.tekelec.com This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT...
  • Page 395 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway LOADSHARE assoc1 AS Table is (3 of 250) 1% full The maximum number of SCTP association to application server assignments that can be hosted by an IPGWx card (referenced by the lhost parameter of the association) is 50. If the number of SCTP association to application server assignments is less than 50, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 396 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible outputs. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 ENT-AS: MASP A - COMPLTD; 9. Verify the changes using the rtrv-as command with the application server name specified in Step For this example, enter this command.
  • Page 397 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-as command Is the association being From added to the application server Sheet 2 shown in the rtrv-as output? Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter: :aname=<association name shown in the rtrv-as output that will be added to the new application...
  • Page 398 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter: :lhost<local host value from the rtrv-assoc output> Enter the Note: An association can be assigned to rtrv-as command with this parameter: more than one application server.
  • Page 399 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the chg-assoc command with What is the current value these parameters: of the open parameter of the :aname=<the name of the association that will be assigned to association being added to the the application server? application server>...

  • Page 400: Figure 53: Adding An Existing Association To A New Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Notes: 1. If the application server is being added in this procedure will be assigned to a routing key containing a rcontext parameter value, the adapter parameter value for the association assigned to this application server can be either M3UA or SUA.

  • Page 401: Adding A New Association To An Existing Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding a New Association to an Existing Application Server This procedure is used assign a new association to an existing application server using the ent-as command. The ent-as command uses these parameters: :asname –...
  • Page 402 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway M2PA associations (adapter=m2pa) cannot be assigned to application servers. Only M3UA (adapter=m3ua) and SUA (adapter=sua) associations can be assigned to application servers. This can be verified in the ADAPTER field in the rtrv-assoc output. The application running on the card hosting the association that will be assigned to the application server must be the same as the application running on the cards hosting the other associations assigned to the application server.
  • Page 403 2. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc7 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc7 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER SUA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS...
  • Page 404 5. Display the IP host names in the database by using the rtrv-ip-host:display=all command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-12-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 40.0.0 LOCAL IPADDR LOCAL HOST 192.1.1.10 IPNODE1-1201 192.1.1.12 GW105. NC. TEKELEC. COM 192.1.1.14 IPNODE1-1205 192.1.1.20 IPNODE2-1201 192.1.1.22 IPNODE2-1203 192.1.1.24 IPNODE2-1205 192.1.1.30...
  • Page 405 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 7. Display the signaling link assigned to the card, shown in Step 6, whose IP address is assigned to the local host shown in Step 5 by entering the rtrv-slk command with the card location of the signaling link.
  • Page 406 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway application shown in Step 4 Step 7. After the new local IP host has been added, continue the procedure withStep 10. Add the new association by performing the Adding an M3UA or SUA Association procedure.
  • Page 407 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway AS table is (2 of 250) 1% full. Note: If you do not wish to change theopen parameter value of the association specified inStep 11, continue the procedure withStep 13.
  • Page 408 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-as command Enter the rtrv-as command with this parameter: :asname=<the name of the application server that the association will be added to> Note: A maximum of 16 associations can be assigned to an application server.
  • Page 409 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the rtrv-asssoc command with this parameter: :aname=<the name of one of the associations assigned to the application server> This step identifies the adapter value for each association.
  • Page 410 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 2 or 4 Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter. :display=all Is the IP host for the new association shown in the rtrv-ip-host output? Perform the "Adding an IP Host" procedure in this chapter and add the desired IP host to the Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk...
  • Page 411 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 2 or 3 Note: An association can be assigned to more than one application server. Enter the Each association and application server combination rtrv-assoc command with this is referred to as an association - application server parameter: assignment.

  • Page 412: Figure 54: Adding A New Association To An Existing Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Notes: From 1. M2PA associations cannot be assigned to an application Sheets 3 server. or 4 2. If the application server is being added in this procedure will be assigned to a routing key containing a rcontext parameter value, the adapter parameter value for the association assigned to this application server can be...

  • Page 413: Adding An Existing Association To An Existing Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an Existing Association to an Existing Application Server This procedure is used assign an existing association to an existing application server using the ent-as command. The ent-as command uses these parameters: :asname –...
  • Page 414 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway M2PA associations (adapter=m2pa) cannot be assigned to application servers. Only M3UA (adapter=m3ua) and SUA (adapter=sua) associations can be assigned to application servers. This can be verified in the ADAPTER field in the rtrv-assoc output. The application running on the card hosting the association that will be assigned to the application server must be the same as the application running on the cards hosting the other associations assigned to the application server.
  • Page 415 For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc7 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc7 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER SUA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 4500 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS...
  • Page 416 For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER SUA RFC LHOST gw101.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 4000 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS...
  • Page 417 8. Display the associations assigned to the local IP host value specified in by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the lhost parameter. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:lhost=gw101.nc.tekelec.com This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0...
  • Page 418 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the number of SCTP association to application server assignments is less than 50, continue the Step procedure with If the number of SCTP association to application server assignments is 50, either repeat this procedure from Step 3, or perform the...
  • Page 419 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 14. Back up the new changes, using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear; the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete.
  • Page 420 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Sheet 1 of 5 From Sheets 1, 3, or 4 Is the association being added to the application server shown in the rtrv-as output on Sheet 1? Enter the rtrv-asssoc command with this parameter: :aname=<the name of one of the...
  • Page 421 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-asssoc command with this parameter: From :aname=<the name of the association being Sheet 2 assigned to the application server from the rtrv-as output (Sheet 1) or the rtrv-assoc output (Sheet 2)>...
  • Page 422 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Note: An association can be assigned to more than Enter the one application server. rtrv-assoc command with this Each association and application server combination parameter: is referred to as an association - application server :lhost<local host value from...

  • Page 423: Figure 55: Adding An Existing Application To An Existing Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 4 What is the open Enter the parameter value of the chg-assoc command with association (shown in the these parameters: rtrv-assoc output on Sheet 3) :aname=<association being added to the name>...

  • Page 424: Adding A Routing Key Containing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding a Routing Key Containing an Application Server This procedure is used to add a routing key containing an application server to the database using the ent-appl-rtkey command. A routing key defines a filter that checks the specified values in an incoming SS7 MSU to determine which, if any, association receives the MSU.
  • Page 425 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway :cics – The starting circuit identification code that is used to filter incoming MSUs. When specified with cice, cics identifies the start of the range of circuit identification codes. The cics parameter is valid only when the si parameter value is set to 4, 5, or 13.

  • Page 426: Table 33: Routing Key Parameter Combinations For Adding A Routing Key Containing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Table 33: Routing Key Parameter Combinations for Adding a Routing Key Containing an Application Server Full Partial Full Routing Partial Full Routing Partial Default Routing Routing Key - SI=4 Routing Key Key - Other Routing Key -...
  • Page 427 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Full Partial Full Routing Partial Full Routing Partial Default Routing Routing Key - SI=4 Routing Key Key - Other Routing Key - Routing Key Key - SI = Key - SI = (TUP), 5 - SI=4 (TUP),...
  • Page 428 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Full Partial Full Routing Partial Full Routing Partial Default Routing Routing Key - SI=4 Routing Key Key - Other Routing Key - Routing Key Key - SI = Key - SI = (TUP), 5 - SI=4 (TUP),...
  • Page 429 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway ---------- 6-006-7 M3UA FULL ---------- 6-006-6 M3UA FULL ---------- 6-006-6 M3UA FULL ---------- 6-006-8 M3UA FULL ---------- 6-006-8 M3UA FULL ---------- 6-024-7 M3UA FULL ---------- 6-024-7 M3UA FULL 7-008-7 FULL...
  • Page 430 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway assoc25 AS Table is (11 of 250) 4% full If the required application server is not in the database, perform one of these procedures to add the application server: Adding a New Association to a New Application Server Adding an Existing Association to a New Application Server Adding a New Association to an Existing Application Server...
  • Page 431 Step For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc11 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 ANAME assoc11 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST gw110.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...
  • Page 432 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN 3000 UAPS OPEN RTXTHR 10000 ASNAMES IP Appl Sock table is (10 of 4000) 1% full...
  • Page 433 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway ANAME assoc16 1211 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER SUA RFC LHOST gw160.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com LPORT 3571 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN 3000...
  • Page 434 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 6. Display the status of the ITU National and International Spare Point Code Support feature by entering the rtrv-ctrl-feat command with the ITU National and International Spare Point Code Support feature part number.
  • Page 435 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 16:31:35 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS lsgw1201 240-020-000 scr1...
  • Page 436 The ISUP Routing over IP feature must be purchased before you turn this feature on with the chg-feat command. If you are not sure if you have purchased the ISUP Routing over IP feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. When the chg-feat has successfully completed, this message should appear.
  • Page 437 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway ent-appl-rtkey:dpci=3-009-3:si=5:opci=4-100-3:cics=100 :cice=500:asname=as3:type=full ent-appl-rtkey:dpci=1-050-2:si=5:opci=6-077-7:cics=200 :cice=300:asname=as20:type=full:rcontext=2000 Note: A routing key cannot be added with the application server as4, displayed in Step 3, because application server as4 is assigned to a routing key containing a routing context value. Only one application server can be assigned to a routing key containing a routing context value.
  • Page 438 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 13. Change the value of the open parameter of the associations that were changed in Step 5 to yes by specifying the chg-assoc command with the open=yes parameter. For this example, enter these commands.
  • Page 439 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-appl-rtkey command Does the Is a default rtrv-appl-rtkey output routing key to be contain a default added? routing key? The database can contain only one default routing key. Another default routing key Enter the cannot be added.
  • Page 440 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Was a new application server added on Sheet 1? Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this Is the rcontext parameter: parameter to be specified :aname=<association name>. for the new routing key? Sheet 3 Repeat this step for each...
  • Page 441 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Is a default routing Sheet 2 key being added? Sheet 5 Are ITU-I or 14-bit ITU-N spare point codes shown in the rtrv-appl-rtkey output on Sheet 1? Are ITU-I or 14-bit ITU-N spare point codes to be assigned to...
  • Page 442 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Enter the rept-ip-iptps command Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter: :lsn=<linkset name from the rept-stat-iptps output>. Perform this step for all the linksets shown in the rept-stat-iptps output.

  • Page 443: Figure 56: Adding A Routing Key Containing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 3 or 4 Is a default Is the SI value Enter the routing key being to be 4, 5, or 13? rtrv-feat command added? Enter the Is the IPISUP ent-appl-rtkey command with the feature on?

  • Page 444: Adding A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding a Network Appearance The network appearance field identifies the SS7 network context for the message, for the purpose of logically separating the signaling traffic between the SGP (signaling gateway process) and the ASP (application server process) over a common SCTP (stream control transmission protocol) association.
  • Page 445 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway CPCN 02091 02092 02094 02097 02191 02192 11177 Step If the desired group code is shown in the rtrv-sid output, continue the procedure with 3. Display the secondary point codes in the database with the rtrv-spc command. This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 446 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Zero entries found. The following features have expired temporary keys: Feature Name Partnum Zero entries found. If the ITU National and International Spare Point Code Support feature is not enabled, perform the “Activating the ITU National and International Spare Point Code Support feature”...
  • Page 447 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-na command Is the gc parameter Enter the rtrv-sid to be specified? command Is the desired gc parameter value shown in the rtrv-sid output? Enter the rtrv-spc command Is the desired gc parameter value shown in...
  • Page 448 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the ituis or From ituns parameters Sheet 1 to be specified? Are ITU-I spare or 14-bit ITU-N spare network appearances are shown in the rtrv-na output on Sheet 1? Was the rtrv-sid Are spare point...

  • Page 449: Figure 57: Adding A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Notes: Enter the ent-na command with these mandatory 1. The group code value (gc) must be shown in parameters: the rtrv-sid or rtrv-spc output. :na=<0 - 4294967295>...

  • Page 450: Activating The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    The enable-ctrl-feat command enables the controlled feature by inputting the controlled feature’s access key and the controlled feature’s part number with these parameters: :fak – The feature access key provided by Tekelec. The feature access key contains 13 alphanumeric characters and is not case sensitive.
  • Page 451 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature is enabled and turned on. UIMs are displayed when most of these circumstances occur. These UIMs are: UIM 1333 – Displayed when a large message is received on an M3UA association and the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature is not enabled or is enabled and turned off.
  • Page 452 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the rtrv-ctrl-feat output in Step 1 shows any controlled features, continue this procedure with Step 6. If the rtrv-ctrl-feat output shows only the HC-MIM SLK Capacity feature with a quantity of 64, Step 2 through...
  • Page 453 Note: A temporary feature access key cannot be specified to enable this feature. Note: The values for the feature access key (the fak parameter) are provided by Tekelec. If you do not have the feature access key for the feature you wish to enable, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative.
  • Page 454 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 9. Back up the new changes using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete.
  • Page 455 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Sheet 1 of 4 Are any controlled From features shown in the Sheet 1 rtrv-ctrl-feat output? (See Note 1) Enter the rtrv-serial-num command Is the EAGLE 5 ISS's serial number in the database correct and is the serial number locked? Sheet 4...
  • Page 456 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the ent-serial-num Is the EAGLE command with these From 5 ISS's serial number parameters: Sheet 2 in the database :serial=<EAGLE 5 ISS's correct? serial number> :lock=yes Sheet 4 Is the EAGLE 5 ISS's serial number...

  • Page 457: Figure 58: Activating The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    Notes: 1. If you do not have the feature access key for the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature, contact your Tekelec sales representative or account representative. 2. This feature can only be permanently enabled. Enter the...

  • Page 458: Removing Ietf M3Ua And Sua Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing IETF M3UA and SUA Components This section describes how to remove the following components from the database. An IPGWx Card – Perform the Removing an IPGWx Card procedure A mate IPGWx linkset from another IPGWx linkset –...
  • Page 459 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Perform the Removing an IPGWx Signaling Link procedure to remove all the signaling links assigned to the card, shown in the LINK column of the rtrv-card output. The card location is shown in the CARD field of the rtrv-card command output.

  • Page 460: Removing An Ipgwx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command The card being removed in this procedure must be running the SS7IPGW or IPGWI applications. Select one of these cards. Perform the Removing an IPGWx Signaling Enter the dlt-card command with Link”...
  • Page 461 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway :link – The signaling link on the card specified in the loc parameter. :force – This parameter must be used to remove the last link in a linkset without having to remove all of the routes that referenced the linkset.
  • Page 462 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway commands. The terminal’s permissions can be verified with the rtrv-secu-trm command. The user’s permissions can be verified with the rtrv-user or rtrv-secu-user commands. For more information about the canc-cmd command, go to the Commands Manual. 1.
  • Page 463 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS lsnlp3 002-009-003 scr2 1 off on SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- ----------- RANDSLS IPSG...
  • Page 464 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 10-07-07 08:41:12 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 Link set table is (20 of 1024) 2% full. CHG-LS: MASP A - COMPLTD 5.
  • Page 465 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-assoc:aname=assoc1:open=no:alw=no When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 10. Deactivate the link to be removed using the dact-slk command, using the output from Step 1 obtain the card location and link parameter value of the signaling link to be removed.
  • Page 466 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Command Completed. 14. Remove the signaling link from the EAGLE 5 ISS using the dlt-slk command. If there is only one signaling link in the linkset, the force=yes parameter must be specified to remove the signaling link.
  • Page 467 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-slk command. Enter the A, B, D, rtrv-ls command with this What is the E, or PRX parameter. linkset type of the linkset :lsn=<the name of the linkset that displayed in the previous contains the signaling link that is step?

  • Page 468: Figure 60: Removing An Ipgwx Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Place out of service any in-service IP connections Enter the on the IPGWx signaling link being removed. rtrv-ip-lnk command with this From parameter. Have the far-end node for the signaling link place Sheet 1 :loc = <location of the signaling the M3UA or SUA associations in either the...

  • Page 469: Removing A Mate Ipgwx Linkset From Another Ipgwx Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing a Mate IPGWx Linkset from another IPGWx Linkset This procedure is used to remove a mate IPGWx linkset from an existing IPGWx linkset chg-ls command with these parameters. :lsn –...
  • Page 470 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway lsgw1101 ---- 6000 5100 5500 05-02-10 11:40:04 RCV: 5100 5500 05-02-10 11:40:04 lsgw1103 ---- 6000 5200 5500 05-02-10 11:40:04 RCV: 5200 5500 05-02-10 11:40:04 lsgw1105 ---- 14000 7300 7450 05-02-10 11:40:04...
  • Page 471 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-17 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS lsgw1105 009-002-003 none...
  • Page 472 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway BPDCM GPL = 002-102-000 IMT BUS A = Conn IMT BUS B = Conn SIGNALING LINK STATUS CLLI IS-NR lsgw1107 ----------- Command Completed. If the status of the card is out-of-service maintenance disabled (OOS-MT-DSBLD), continue the procedure with Step If the status of the card is not out-of-service maintenance disabled (OOS-MT-DSBLD), continue the...
  • Page 473 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-12-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 40.0.0 LOCAL IPADDR LOCAL HOST 192.3.1.10 IPNODE1_1107 IP Host table is (11 of 2048) 1% full 7.
  • Page 474 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway CAUTION: This command impacts network performance and should only be used during periods of low traffic. After this command has successfully completed, this message appears. rlghncxa03w 08-04-12 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 Deactivate Link message sent to card.
  • Page 475 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 14. Allow the IP card that was inhibited in Step 11 using the alw-card command. For example, enter this command. alw-card:loc=1107 This message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:21:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 Card has been allowed.
  • Page 476 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rept-stat-iptps command Are any entries displayed?
  • Page 477 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is a signaling link assigned to the mate linkset, From shown in the rtrv-ls output on Sheet 1 Sheet 1, that is being removed? Enter the rept-stat-card command with this parameter: :loc=<the card location of the signaling link that is assigned to the mate linkset that is...
  • Page 478 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are the IP connections on the IPGWx signaling link to be placed out of service by the far end From node for the IPGWx signaling link? Sheet 2 Note: This is the recommended method for placing the IP connections out of service.

  • Page 479: Figure 61: Removing A Mate Ipgwx Linkset From Another Ipgwx Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the dact-slk command with Enter the inh-card command these parameters: From with this parameter: :loc=<the card location used in the Sheet 3 :loc=<the card location used rept-stat-slk command on Sheet 2>...

  • Page 480: Removing An Ip Host Assigned To An Ipgwx Card

    192.1.1.32 KC-HLR2 192.1.1.50 DN-MSC1 192.1.1.52 DN-MSC2 192.3.3.33 GW100. NC. TEKELEC. COM REMOTE IPADDR REMOTE HOST 150.1.1.5 NCDEPTECONOMIC_DEVELOPMENT. SOUTHEASTERN_COORIDOR_ASHVL. GOV IP Host table is (12 of 2048) 1% full Step If the IP host that is being removed is a remote host, continue the procedure with...
  • Page 481 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2103 192.1.1.22 255.255.255.0 FULL 2103 --------------- --------------- HALF 2105 192.1.1.24 255.255.255.0 FULL 2105 --------------- --------------- HALF 2205 192.1.1.30 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF...
  • Page 482 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (4 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (16 KB of 3200 KB) on LOC = 1203 If no associations referencing the host name being removed in this procedure are shown in this step, continue the procedure with Step Any associations referencing the host name must either be removed or the host name assigned to...

  • Page 483: Removing An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Remote Host Enter the rtrv-ip-host Is the host Name command with this name shown a local parameter. host name or a remote :display=all host name? Local Host Name Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk command...
  • Page 484 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The dlt-ip-rte command uses these parameters. :loc – The location of the IP card containing the IP route being removed. :dest – The IP address of the remote host or network assigned to the IP route being removed. :force –...
  • Page 485 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway inh-card:loc=1301 When this command has successfully completed, this message appears. rlghncxa03w 06-10-12 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Card has been inhibited. 4. Remove the IP route from the database using the dlt-ip-rte command. If the state of the IP card is not OOS-MT-DSBLD, the force=yes parameter must be specified with the dlt-ip-rte command.

  • Page 486: Removing A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ip-rte command Enter the rept-stat-card:loc=<location of IP card containing the IP route being removed> command Is the state of the IP card OOS-MT-DSBLD? Do you wish to Enter the place the IP card in the inh-card:loc=<IP card...
  • Page 487 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway an IPSG Association procedure to remove a M3UA association that is assigned to a card running the IPSG application. The dlt-assoc command uses one parameter, aname, the name of the association being removed from the database.
  • Page 488 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-03-06 15:17:20 EST EAGLE5 38.0.0 CARD TYPE APPL LSET NAME LINK SLC LSET NAME LINK SLC 1201 SS7IPGW lsn1 If the application assigned to the card is SS7IPGW or IPGWI, shown in the APPL column, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 489 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 No matching entries found IP Appl Sock table is (3 of 4000) 1% full 7.

  • Page 490: Removing An Association From An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is an M3UA Enter the rtrv-assoc association being command removed? Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: :loc = <the location of the card containing the M3UA association that is shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...
  • Page 491 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The dlt-as command uses these parameters: :asname – The application server name containing the association being removed in this procedure. :aname – The name of the association being removed from the application server. The association name and application server name combination must be in the database.
  • Page 492 IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE...
  • Page 493 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway assoc1 assoc2 assoc3 assoc5 assoc6 RCONTEXT DPCI SI SSN OPCI CICS CICE ---------- 2-100-7 6 --- ----------- ---------- ---------- STATIC ADPTR TYPE ASNAME M3UA FULL ANAMES assoc1 assoc2 assoc3 assoc5...
  • Page 494 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 8. Back up the new changes, using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear;...
  • Page 495 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Enter the rtrv-as rtrv-assoc:aname=<association command name from the rtrv-as output> command Enter the chg-assoc command with these What is the parameters: value of the open :aname=<association name from parameter? the rtrv-as output>...

  • Page 496: Figure 65: Removing An Association From An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the dlt-as command with these parameters: :asname = <application server name containing the association being removed> :aname = <association name being removed from the application server> Note: If the association being removed is the only association assigned to the application server, the application server is...

  • Page 497: Removing A Routing Key Containing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing a Routing Key Containing an Application Server This procedure is used remove a static key from the database using the dlt-appl-rtkey command. For more information about static and dynamic routing keys, see Understanding Routing for SS7IPGW and IPGWI Applications.

  • Page 498: Table 35: Routing Key Parameter Combinations For Removing Routing Keys

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway :rcontext – The routing context parameter value assigned to the routing key. The parameter combinations used by the dlt-appl-rtkey command are based on the type of routing key and the service indicator value in the routing key.
  • Page 499 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Full Partial Full Routing Partial Full Routing Partial Default Routing Routing Routing Key Routing Key Routing Key (See Notes 1, SI=4 (TUP), SI=4 (TUP), Other SI Other SI 3, and 4) SI=3 SI=3...
  • Page 500 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2000 005-005-001 as10 FULL ---------- 006-006-001 M3UA as11 FULL ---------- 006-006-001 M3UA as11 FULL RCONTEXT DPCI ADPTR ASNAME TYPE ---------- 2-100-7 M3UA FULL 3-137-6 FULL 4-035-7 M3UA FULL ---------- 6-006-6...
  • Page 501 3. For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE...
  • Page 502 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway ASNAMES IP Appl Sock table is (8 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (16 KB of 800 KB) on LOC = 1203 Repeat this step for all the associations shown in Step 2 Step 5.
  • Page 503 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 No matching entries found STATIC Route Key table is (12 of 2000) 1% full STATIC Route Key Socket Association table is (6 of 32000) 1% full Note: If Step 5...
  • Page 504 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-appl-rtkey command Select a routing key from the rtrv-appl-rtkey output. Display the information about the routing key being removed by entering the rtrv-appl-rtkey Does this routing key command with the display=all contain a routing context parameter and at least one of...

  • Page 505: Figure 66: Removing A Routing Key Containing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the dlt-appl-rtkey command with the parameter combinations shown in the Routing Key Parameter Combinations for Removing Routing Keys table in this procedure, and the values shown in the previous step, depending on the type of routing key being removed.

  • Page 506: Removing A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing a Network Appearance This procedure removes the network appearance from the database using the dlt-na command with these parameters. :na – the 32-bit value of the network appearance, from 0 to 4294967295. :type –...

  • Page 507: Figure 67: Removing A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway These messages should appear; the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP.

  • Page 508: Changing Ietf M3Ua And Sua Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing IETF M3UA and SUA Components This section describes how to change the attributes of the following components in the database. IP Options – Perform the Changing IP Options procedure.
  • Page 509 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway :trapcomm – The community name used when sending SNMP traps. This value applies to each IP card SNMP agent. :ipgwabate – enables (ipgwabate=yes) or disables (ipgwabate=no) SS7 congestion abatement procedures for IPGWx signaling links (signaling links assigned to cards running the ss7ipgw or ipgwi applications).
  • Page 510 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 3. Change the IP options in the database using the chg-sg-opts command. For this example, enter this command. chg-sg-opts:srkq=200:ipgwabate=yes:uameasusedftas=no When this command has successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:18:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CHG-SG-OPTS: MASP A - COMPLTD 4.

  • Page 511: Figure 68: Changing Ip Options

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-sg-opts command Is the srkq Enter the rtrv-tbl-capacity parameter value being command changed? The new srkq parameter value cannot be less than the number of rounting keys that are currently provisioned.

  • Page 512: Changing The Attributes Of A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    The RFC 2960 standard for congestion control is also used. lin – Tekelec's linear retransmission policy where each retransmission timeout value is the same as the initial transmission timeout and only the slow start algorithm is used for congestion control.
  • Page 513 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway :rtimes – The number of times a data retransmission will occur before closing the association, from 3 - 12. :cwmin – The minimum size in bytes of the association's congestion window and the initial size in bytes of the congestion window, from 1500 - 409600.
  • Page 514 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The command input is limited to 150 characters, including the hostnames. The adapter parameter value cannot be changed if the association is assigned to an application server. This can be verified with the rtrv-as command.
  • Page 515 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-06 15:17:20 EST EAGLE5 38.0.0 CARD TYPE APPL LSET NAME LINK SLC LSET NAME LINK SLC 1205 SS7IPGW e5e6a If the application assigned to the card is IPSG, perform Changing the Attributes of an IPSG Association.
  • Page 516 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-25 14:02:39 EST 38.0.0 rtrv-slk:loc=1101 Command entered at terminal #4. LINK LSN SLC TYPE 1205 A e5e6a SS7IPGW If a signaling link is shown in this step, perform one of these actions. If only the alw parameter is being specified with the open=yes parameter, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 517 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (8 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (800 KB of 800 KB) on LOC = 1205 Continue the procedure by performing one of these steps. If only the rtxthr parameter value is being changed, continue the procedure with Step If the adapter, uaps, or cwmin parameter values are not being changed, continue the procedure...
  • Page 518 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 3000 10000 5000 TIMER 2: False IP Connection Congestion Timer, max time an association can be congested before failing due to false congestion. SS7IPGW and IPGWI applications enforce 0-30000(ms).
  • Page 519 11. Assign a primary remote host to the association by entering the chg-assoc command with the name of the association and the primary remote host name. For this example, enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc2:rhost= gw200.nc-tekelec.com The rhosttype=primary parameter can be specified with the chg-assoc command, but is not necessary.
  • Page 520 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 12. Change the association using the chg-assoc command. For this example, enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc2:rhost= gw200.nc-tekelec.com :rport=3000 :rtxthr=10000:rhostval=match If an alternate remote host is being specified for the association, for this example enter this command.
  • Page 521 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the Removing an Association from an Application Server procedure in Step 7 was not performed, continue the procedure with Step 15. Assign the association changed in Step 12 to all applicable application servers by performing one of these procedures:...
  • Page 522 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Select an association to change whose adapter value is M3UA or SUA. Does the card containing the association that will be changed, contain any SUA associations? Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter:...
  • Page 523 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are only the From open, alw, or rtxthr Sheet 1 parameter values being Sheet 4 changed? Is the open parameter value being changed to yes? Sheet 3 (See the Note) Was the rtrv-card command...
  • Page 524 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Is the rtxthr parameter value being changed? Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter. :aname=<name of the association name being changed> Enter the chg-assoc with this mandatory parameter: :aname=<name of the association being changed>...
  • Page 525 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the chg-assoc command What is the with these parameters. From value of the open :aname=<name of the Sheet 2 parameter? association being changed> :open=no Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter: :aname=<name of the association being changed>...
  • Page 526 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note 1. If the uaps parameter will not be From specified with the chg-assoc command, and the Sheet 4 adapter parameter value is being changed to either m3ua or sua, the UA parameter set 10 will be assigned to the association.
  • Page 527 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 5 Is a remote host value being changed? Specify the rhost parameter with the chg-assoc command on Sheet 7. This will change the primary remote host value, Is the alternate shown in the RHOST field of remote host value being...
  • Page 528 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 6 Enter the chg-assoc Notes: :aname=<association name being 1. If any optional parameters are not changed> command with these optional specified with the chg-assoc parameters: command, those values are not :lport = <TCP port for the local host>...

  • Page 529: Figure 69: Changing The Attributes Of A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 7 Perform one of these procedures in this chapter to add the association to the Was the application servers: association removed from Adding an Existing Association to a New any application servers on Application Server Sheet 4?

  • Page 530: Changing The Buffer Size Of A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Buffer Size of a M3UA or SUA Association This procedure is used to change the buffer size of a M3UA or a SUA association, assigned to cards that are running the SS7IPGW or IPGWI applications, using the chg-assoc command.
  • Page 531 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered. To enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx> command, the terminal must allow Security Administration commands to be entered from it and the user must be allowed to enter Security Administration commands.
  • Page 532 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 4. Display the association being changed by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the aname parameter specified in Step 3 or the association selected in...
  • Page 533 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 6. Display each association shown in Step 5 by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the name of each association shown in Step For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc2 This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 534 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway LPORT 1500 RPORT 3000 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN 3000 UAPS OPEN RTXTHR 10000 RHOSTVAL RELAXED ASNAMES IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (8 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (800 KB of 800 KB) on LOC = 1205 7.
  • Page 535 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc2 1205 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST IPNODE2-1205 ALHOST RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 2048 RPORT 3000 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES...
  • Page 536 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock table is (8 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (650 KB of 800 KB) on LOC = 1205 13. Back up the new changes, using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear;...
  • Page 537 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Select an association to change whose adapter value is M3UA or SUA. Does the card containing the association that will be changed, contain any SUA associations? Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter:...
  • Page 538 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 The new buffer size for this association cannot exceed the available buffer size for the card. Do the buffers If you wish to increase the buffer size on the other associations for this association to a value that is assigned to the card need...
  • Page 539 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Either choose another value for the bufsize parameter that is Is the new bufsize greater than or equal to the value greater than or equal to cwmin value, or change the the cwmin parameter value? cwmin value by performing the...

  • Page 540: Figure 70: Changing The Buffer Size Of An M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Do you wish Perform the Changing the to change the LHOST or Host Values of an M3UA or ALHOST values of the SUA Association” procedure. M2PA association ? Do you wish to Perform the Changing the...

  • Page 541: Changing The Host Values Of A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Host Values of a M3UA or SUA Association This procedure is used to change the host values of a M3UA or SUA association, assigned to cards that are running the SS7IPGW or IPGWI applications, using the chg-assoc command.

  • Page 542: Table 37: Examples Of Ipgwx Card Provisioning Limits

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Table 37: Examples of IPGWx Card Provisioning Limits Number of Associations hosted Number of Application Servers Total Association - Application by the IPGWx card each Association is Assigned Server Assignments maintained to * by the IPGWx card...
  • Page 543 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rtrv-assoc or rtrv-as commands were entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rtrv-assoc or rtrv-as commands were entered. To enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx> command, the terminal must allow Security Administration commands to be entered from it and the user must be allowed to enter Security Administration commands.
  • Page 544 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 3. Change the value of the open parameter to no by specifying the chg-assoc command with the open=no parameter. For this example, enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc2:open=no When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD;...
  • Page 545 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 192.1.1.10 IPNODE1-1201 192.1.1.12 GW105. NC. TEKELEC. COM 192.1.1.14 IPNODE1-1205 192.1.1.20 IPNODE2-1201 192.1.1.22 IPNODE2-1203 192.1.1.24 IPNODE2-1205 192.1.1.30 KC-HLR1 192.1.1.32 KC-HLR2 192.1.1.50 DN-MSC1 192.1.1.52 DN-MSC2 REMOTE IPADDR REMOTE HOST 150.1.1.5...
  • Page 546 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway for the association. The IP address of the IP link should be assigned to the host name, shown in the rtrv-ip-host output, that will be used as the association’s lhost parameter value. If the alhost parameter will be specified for the association, the IP address of the IP link must be assigned to the host name that will be used as the alhost parameter value.
  • Page 547 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway LOADSHARE 2000 assoc2 AS Table is (6 of 250) 1% full rtrv-as:aname=assoc3 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 AS Name Mode Tr ms Association Names...
  • Page 548 12. Change the association using the chg-assoc command. For this example, enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc2:lhost=m3ua1:alhost=m3ua2:rhost= gw200.nc-tekelec.com These are the rules that apply to the chg-assoc command. If any optional parameters are not specified with the chg-assoc command, those values are not changed.
  • Page 549 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc2 1205 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST m3ua1 ALHOST m3ua2 RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 2048 RPORT 3000 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN...
  • Page 550 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 15. Back up the new changes, using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear; the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete.
  • Page 551 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Select an association to change whose adapter value is M3UA or SUA. What is the value of the open parameter? Does the card containing the association that will be changed, contain any SUA associations?
  • Page 552 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet1 Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter. :display=all Is the required host Enter the name shown in the rtrv-ip-lnk command rtrv-ip-host output? From Sheet 3 Enter the rept-stat-card command with this parameter:...
  • Page 553 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Enter the Note: An association can be assigned to rtrv-assoc command with this more than one application server. parameter: Each association and application server :lhost<local host value from combination is referred to as an the rtrv-ip-host output>...
  • Page 554 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 2 or 3 Enter the rtrv-slk command with this Is the link parameter: parameter value being :loc=<card location of the IP changed? signaling link associated with the local host>...
  • Page 555 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 4 From Sheet 1 Enter the chg-assoc :aname=<association name being changed> command with these optional parameters: :lhost = <local host name from the rtrv-ip-host output> :lport = <TCP port for the local host>...

  • Page 556: Figure 71: Changing The Host Values Of A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 5 Do you wish to Perform the Changing the change the buffer size Buffer Size of an M3UA or of the M3UA or SUA SUA Association” procedure in association? this chapter.

  • Page 557: Configuring Sctp Retransmission Control For A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    The RFC 2960 standard for congestion control is also used. lin – Tekelec's linear retransmission mode where each retransmission timeout value is the same as the initial transmission timeout and only the slow start algorithm is used for congestion control.
  • Page 558 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Attributes of a M3UA or SUA Association procedure, or in the and chg-assoc command description in the Commands Manual. Canceling the RTRV-ASSOC Command Because the rtrv-assoc command used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped.
  • Page 559 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PING command in progress rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PING GW100. NC. TEKELEC. COM (192.1.1.30): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=0. time=5. ms 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=1. time=9. ms 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=2.
  • Page 560 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The assocrtt command is entered with the card location from Step 4 (the card location assigned to the association being changed), and the name of the association being changed. This association must contain the local host name used in Step 4.
  • Page 561 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Send/Rcv Buffer Size = 204800 Nets Data IP Address 192.168.112.4 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.113.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd...
  • Page 562 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Aname Local Local Remote Remote IP Address Port Address Port Assoc1 192.168.110.12 2222 192.168.112.4 5555 192.168.112.12 Configuration State Retransmission Mode = LIN State = OPEN Min. Retransmission Timeout = 10 ULP association id = 18 Max.
  • Page 563 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway none left tosend = 0 none left rwnd gate = 5 none left cwnd gate = 8 SCTP command complete 8. Perform the Changing the Attributes of a M3UA or SUA Association procedure to change the retransmission parameters of the association based on the results of the outputs of Step 6...
  • Page 564 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: Is an M3UA Enter the rtrv-assoc :loc = <the location of the card association being command containing the M3UA association changed? that will be changed, shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...

  • Page 565: Figure 72: Configuring Sctp Retransmission Control For A M3Ua Or Sua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the pass:loc=<card location specified with the ping command> :cmd="assocrtt <name of the association specified with the ping command>" command to display the round trip time data collected after an association is established when an SCTP INIT message is sent and an acknowlegement is received.

  • Page 566: Changing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing an Application Server This procedure is used change the characteristics of an existing application server using the chg-as command. The chg-as command uses these parameters: :asname – The name of the application server being changed. :mode –...
  • Page 567 For this example, enter this command. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.ncd-economic-development.southeastern-corridor-ash.gov ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 2345 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE...
  • Page 568 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-as:asname=as1:mode=override:tr=1000 This is an example of possible inputs and outputs: rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-AS: MASP A - COMPLTD; 6. Verify the changes using the rtrv-as command. This is an example of possible output.
  • Page 569 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-as command Is the mode parameter value for the application Sheet 2 server being changed? Enter the rtrv-assoc:aname=<association name from the rtrv-as output> command Enter the chg-assoc command with these What is the parameters:...

  • Page 570: Figure 73: Changing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the chg-as command with this mandatory parameter: :asname = <AS name> and with at least one of these optional parameters: :mode = <override, loadshare> :tr = <10 2000>...

  • Page 571: Changing The Cic Values In An Existing Routing Key Containing An Application Server

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the CIC Values in an Existing Routing Key Containing an Application Server This procedure is used to change the CIC values in an existing routing key using the chg-appl-rtkey command.

  • Page 572: Table 39: Routing Key Parameter Combinations For Changing The Range Of Cic Values In An Existing Routing Key

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway :type - Key type. Identifies the type of routing key that will be changed. One of three values, type=full/partial/default. If type is not explicitly specified, type=full is assumed. Only the type=full parameter can be used in this procedure.
  • Page 573 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway SI=4 (TUP) SI=5 (ISUP) SI=13 (QBICC) type=full type=full type=full type=full ncics=<0 to 4095> (See ncics=<0 to 16383> (See ncics=<0 to 4095> (See ncics=<0 to 4294967295> Notes 2 and 3) Notes 2 and 3) Notes 2 and 3) (See Notes 2 and 3)

  • Page 574: Table 40: Routing Key Parameter Combinations For Splitting The Range Of Cic Values In

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Splitting the range of CIC values creates two routing keys. The CIC values in one routing key ranges from the cics value of the original routing key to a value equal to one less than the split value. The CIC values in the other routing key ranges from the split value to the cice value of the original routing key.
  • Page 575 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Canceling the RTRV-APPL-RTKEY Command Because the rtrv-appl-rtkey command used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rtrv-appl-rtkey command can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped.
  • Page 576 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the routing key being changed does not contain a routing context value, specify the DPC, SI, and TYPE values shown in the rtrv-appl-rtkey output in Step 1 for the routing key being changed.
  • Page 577 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-appl-rtkey:rcontext=225:ncice=4000 To split the range of CIC values for this example, enter this command. chg-appl-rtkey:dpca=123-234-123:si=5:opca=122-124-125:cics=1:cice=1000:split=500 When this command has successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-APPL-RTKEY: MASP A - COMPLTD 4.
  • Page 578 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway STATIC Route Key table is (17 of 2000) 1% full STATIC Route Key Socket Association table is (17 of 32000) 1% full rtrv-appl-rtkey:dpca=123-234-123:si=5:cics=1:cice=1000 :display=all rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 RCONTEXT SI SSN OPC CICS...
  • Page 579 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Does the routing key Enter the rtrv-appl-rtkey have a routing context command Sheet 2 value assigned to it? Display the information about the routing key being changed by entering the rtrv-appl-rtkey command with this parameter: :display=all...

  • Page 580: Figure 74: Changing The Cic Values In An Existing Routing Key Containing An

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Display the information about the routing key being changed by entering the rtrv-appl-rtkey command with this parameter: :display=all Change the Range and with these parameter values shown in the How are the CIC of CIC Values previous rtrv-appl-rtkey output:...

  • Page 581: Changing The Routing Context Value In An Existing Routing Key

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Routing Context Value in an Existing Routing Key This procedure is used to change the routing context value in an existing routing key using the chg-appl-rtkey command.
  • Page 582 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway :ssn – The subsystem number value that is used to filter incoming MSUs. :cics - Starting circuit identification code that is used to filter incoming MSUs. :cice - Ending circuit identification code that is used to filter incoming MSUs. :type - Key type.
  • Page 583 Step rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1203 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER SUA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...
  • Page 584 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN 3000 UAPS OPEN RTXTHR 10000 RHOSTVAL RELAXED ASNAMES IP Appl Sock table is (4 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (16 KB of 800 KB) on LOC = 1203 Repeat this step for each association name displayed in Step...
  • Page 585 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway assoc1 STATIC Route Key table is (17 of 2000) 1% full STATIC Route Key Socket Association table is (17 of 32000) 1% full Note: If Step 4 was not performed in this procedure, continue the procedure with Step 7.
  • Page 586 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-appl-rtkey command Display the information about the routing key being changed by Enter the entering the rtrv-appl-rtkey rtrv-assoc command with this command with these parameters. parameter.

  • Page 587: Figure 75: Changing The Routing Context Value In An Existing Routing Key

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the chg-appl-rtkey command with these parameters: :rcontext=<current routing context value assigned to the routing key> :nrcontext=<new routing context value, 0 - 4294967295> The new routing context value cannot be assigned to another routing key Enter the rtrv-appl-rtkey command with these parameters:...

  • Page 588: Changing The Sctp Checksum Algorithm Option For M3Ua And Sua Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for M3UA and SUA Associations Use this procedure to change the SCTP checksum algorithm, either Adler-32 or CRC-32c, applied to traffic on SCTP associations. The sctpcsum parameter of the chg-sg-opts command is used to change this option.
  • Page 589 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1. Display the current IP options in the database by entering the rtrv-sg-opts command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 SCTPCSUM: adler32 The rtrv-sg-opts command output contains other fields that are not used by this procedure.
  • Page 590 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway ---------------------------------- ----------------------------- rate msus bytes rate msus bytes ----- ---------- --------------- ----- ---------- ---------- 2000 4294967295 4294967295 2000 4294967295 4294967295 MTP Primitive (MTPP) counts Reroute Counts ---------------------------------- ---------------------- sent pdus rcvd pdus...
  • Page 591 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway For this example, the local host name of associations assigned to the IP card 1315 (the card specified Step 4) is DN-MSC1. Enter this command. rtrv-assoc:lhost=dn-msc1 The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD IPLNK ANAME...
  • Page 592 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway END of Report pass:loc=1315:cmd= msucount -a assoc6 The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PASS: Command sent to card rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 MSUCOUNT: Command In Progress rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0...
  • Page 593 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-sg-opts:sctpcsum=crc32c When this command has successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:19:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-SG-OPTS: MASP A - COMPLTD Continue the procedure by performing one of these actions. If the sctpcsum parameter value was changed to either adler32 or crc32c, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 594 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway assoc3 192.1.1.50 2345 192.168.112.4 1025 192.1.1.50 Configuration State Retransmission Mode = LIN State = OPEN Min. Retransmission Timeout = 10000 ULP association id = 18 Max. Retransmission Timeout = 800000 Number of nets = 2 Max.
  • Page 595 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway recv timer count = 0 heartbeat timer count = 244 none left tosend = 0 none left rwnd gate = 5 none left cwnd gate = 8 rlghncxa03w 10-12-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 43.0.0 SCTP command complete rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0...
  • Page 596 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway gap ack blocks rcvd = 3 heartbeat requests rcvd = 135 heartbeat acks rcvd = 52 heartbeat requests sent = 52 ip datagrams sent = 129254 ip datagrams with data chunks sent = 73084 data chunks sent = 396330 retransmit data chunks sent = 135 sacks sent = 64872...
  • Page 597 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway My Rwnd = 16384 Max Window = 16384 Initial Seq Number = 24130 Next Sending Seq Number = 124686 Last Acked Seq Number = 124669 Maximum Outbound Char Count = 16384 Current Outbound Char Count = 2112 Number Unsent Char Count = 0 Outbound Data Chunk Count = 16...
  • Page 598 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Address 192.168.112.4 State Reachable Port 1025 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.112.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880...
  • Page 599 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway SCTP command complete If the checksum algorithm shown in any of the associations displayed in this step do not match the checksum algorithm specified in Step 11, contact the Customer Care Center. Refer to Customer Care Center for the contact information.
  • Page 600 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT LINK ASPID 1315 A IS-NR ESTABLISHED 4294967295 ASNAME ANAME ASP-STATE assoc6...
  • Page 601 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway NETSTAT command complete If errors are shown in the pass command output, contact the Customer Care Center. Refer to Customer Care Center for the contact information. 22. At the IP near end node, connect all the other associations attached to the IP card specified in Step 23.
  • Page 602 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway -------------------------- Receive Counts Transmit Counts -------------------------------- ----------------------------- msus bytes msus bytes ---------- ---------------- ---------- ---------- 4294967295 4294967295 4294967295 4294967295 Receive Discard Counts Transmit Discard Counts -------------------------------- --------------------------------- reason count reason...
  • Page 603 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway error in XSRV packet 4294967295 M3UA PDU error 4294967295 SUA PDU error 4294967295 invalid rcontext 4294967295 Stored Transmit Discard Data ---------------------------- no stored transmit discard data Stored Receive Discard Data --------------------------- 53 41 53 49 69 73 6f 74 11 00 87 0a 01 03 01 05 05 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 00 00 00 00 00...
  • Page 604 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-sg-opts command Enter the rtrv-card command. Record the card locations and signaling link information for all cards running the SS7IPGW and IPGWI applications. From Sheet 4 Have the IP near end node stop all traffic to one of the cards running the SS7IPGW or IPGWI applications on...
  • Page 605 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 What will the Enter the PERCARD new sctpcsum value chg-sg-opts:sctpcsum=percard command ADLER32, CRC32C Perform the Configuring an IP Card” procedure in this chapter to assign an sctpcsum parameter Enter the value for the card.
  • Page 606 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Have the IP near end node configure all associations attached to the card specified in the pass command on Sheet 2 to use the new algorithm.

  • Page 607: Figure 76: Changing The Sctp Checksum Algorithm Option For M3Ua And Sua Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 At the IP near end node, connect all At the IP near end node, activate one of the other associations attached to of the associations attached to the the card specified in the act-slk and card specified in the act-slk and pass pass commands on Sheet 3.

  • Page 608: Changing A Ua Parameter Set

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing a UA Parameter Set Use this procedure to change the values in a UA (user adapter) parameter set using the chg-uaps command. The chg-uaps command uses these parameters. :set –...

  • Page 609: Table 42: Valid Pvalue Parameter Values If Parm=1

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway 6 – Broadcast Congestion Status Change – controls the sending of unsolicited congestion status changes by an ASP. Unsolicited congestion status messages (TFCs generated when a destination's congestion status changes) are replicated to all ASPs who have this capability and meet the Multicast SNM Criteria.

  • Page 610: Table 43: Valid Pvalue Parameter Values If Parm=2

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Bits Enabled Bits Disabled Hexadecimal Decimal Value Value Bit 6 - Broadcast Congestion Status Change * The system default value If the parm value is 2, the bits used by the pvalue parameter are: 0 –...

  • Page 611: Table 44: Valid Pvalue Parameter Values If Parm=3

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Bits Enabled Bits Disabled Hexadecimal Decimal Value Value Bit 0 - ASP Activate Notifications Bit 2 - ASP AS State Query h’4 Bit 1 - ASP Inactivate Notifications Bit 0 - ASP Activate Notifications Bit 1 - ASP Inactivate Notifications h’5...

  • Page 612: Table 45: Valid Pvalue Parameter Values If Parm=4

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Bits Enabled Bits Disabled Hexadecimal Decimal Value Value * The system default value If the parm value is 4, the bit 0, the SCTP Payload Protocol Indicator byte order option, is used by the pvalue parameter.
  • Page 613 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway command. The user’s permissions can be verified with the rtrv-user or rtrv-secu-user commands. For more information about the canc-cmd command, go to the Commands Manual. 1. Display the values in the UA parameter set being changed by entering the rtrv-uaps command and specifying the desired UA parameter set number, from 1 to 9.
  • Page 614 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway PARM 3: UA Serviceability Options. Each bit is used as an enabled/disabled flag for a particular UA Serviceability option. Supported on IPSG, SS7IPGW, and IPGWI applications. UA Graceful Shutdown supported on IPSG for M3UA only. PVALUE : Valid range = 32-bits BIT VALUE 0=UA Heartbeats...
  • Page 615 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway application. PVALUE : Valid range = 32-bits BIT VALUE 0=Broadcast 0=Disabled , 1=Enabled 1=Response Method 0=Disabled , 1=Enabled 2-5=Reserved 6=Broadcast Congestion Status Change 0=Disabled , 1=Enabled 7-31=Reserved PARM 2: ASP/AS Notification options.
  • Page 616 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-uaps:set=5:scrset=10 When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-UAPS: MASP A - COMPLTD 4. Verify the changes using the rtrv-uaps command with the UA parameter set name used in Step 3.
  • Page 617 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway PARM 3: UA Serviceability Options. Each bit is used as an enabled/disabled flag for a particular UA Serviceability option. Supported on IPSG, SS7IPGW, and IPGWI applications. UA Graceful Shutdown supported on IPSG for M3UA only. PVALUE : Valid range = 32-bits BIT VALUE 0=UA Heartbeats...
  • Page 618 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway PARM 2: ASP/AS Notification options. Each bit is used as an enabled/disabled flag for a particular ASP/AS Notification option. Not supported on IPSG application. PVALUE : Valid range = 32-bits BIT VALUE 0=ASP Active Notifications 0=Disabled , 1=Enabled...

  • Page 619: Turning The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature Off

    Changing a UA Parameter Set” procedure in the Database Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway. Figure 77: Changing a UA Parameter Set Turning the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Feature Off This procedure is used to turn off the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature, using the chg-ctrl-feat command.
  • Page 620 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The chg-ctrl-feat command uses these parameters: :partnum – The part number of the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature, 893018401. :status=off – used to turn off the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature. The status of the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature must be on and is shown with the rtrv-ctrl-feat command.
  • Page 621 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway The following features have expired temporary keys: Feature Name Partnum Zero entries found. 4. Back up the new changes using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first.

  • Page 622: Figure 78: Turning The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature Off

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ctrl-feat command with this parameter: :partnum=893018401 This procedure cannot be Is the Large MSU perfomed. To turn the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling Support for IP Signaling feature off, feature enabled the Large MSU Support for IP and turned on?

  • Page 623: Chapter 5: End Office Support

    Chapter End Office Support Topics: Chapter 5, End Office Support, describes the procedures necessary to allow the EAGLE 5 ISS to Overview..624 share its true point code (TPC) with an IP-based End Office Support Configuration..633 node without the need for a separate point code for the IP node.

  • Page 624: Overview

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Overview End Office Support enables the EAGLE 5 ISS to share its true point code (TPC) with an IP-based node without the need for a separate point code for the IP node. When the End Office Support feature is in use, the EAGLE 5 ISS shares a point code for up to three network types with attached IP network elements.

  • Page 625: Table 46: Sample Ipc Values

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Received SCCP Messages that indicate route-on-global-title are treated as having SSN=0 for remote application assignment. If a remote application is assigned to SSN=0, then the message is forwarded, otherwise it is distributed to the local SCCP application. In previous releases, this would occur only for mis-configured networks.
  • Page 626 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Assigned to Assigned Network User-Part Action taken when MSU is End Office SSNs Type (SI) received for the TPC Node No application can be assigned FALSE for SI=2. SCCP messages destined to the TSPC and with SSN assigned are forwarded to an end office node.
  • Page 627 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Assigned to Assigned Network User-Part Action taken when MSU is End Office SSNs Type (SI) received for the TPC Node QBICC messages destined to the TRUE TSPC are forwarded to the end office node.

  • Page 628: Figure 79: An Eagle 5 Iss With End Office Support And Vxi Node

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Figure 79: An EAGLE 5 ISS with End Office Support and VXI Node One Node Migrates from PSTN to IP Figure 80: Network Before an EAGLE 5 ISS with End Office, Node P is to Migrate Figure 81: Network After an EAGLE 5 ISS with End Office, Node P has Migrated depict the migration of a signaling end point...

  • Page 629: Figure 82: Original Network With Deployed Eagle 5 Iss

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Figure 81: Network After an EAGLE 5 ISS with End Office, Node P has Migrated the EAGLE 5 ISS no longer acts like a signaling transfer point, but rather acts like a signaling end point that has an IP-attached application user-part.

  • Page 630: Figure 84: Network Before Two Signaling End Points Migrate From Pstn To Ip

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Two Signaling End Points Move from PSTN to IP Using End Office A more complex scenario arises when multiple signaling end points are to migrate from the PSTN to an IP network using the End Office feature. Consider Figure 84: Network before Two Signaling End Points Migrate from PSTN to IP Figure 85: Network after Two Signaling End Points Migrate from PSTN to...

  • Page 631: Figure 86: The Eagle 5 Iss Simultaneously Acts As Stp And End Office

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Figure 86: The EAGLE 5 ISS Simultaneously Acts as STP and End Office Notes regarding Figure 86: The EAGLE 5 ISS Simultaneously Acts as STP and End Office: P is the end office node, and so the EAGLE 5 ISS TPC=P. Assume that end node P has an application assignment for SCCP.

  • Page 632: Figure 87: Three Multiple-Element End Office Nodes

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Figure 87: Three Multiple-Element End Office Nodes Mated Pair Supports Two End Office Nodes Figure 88: Mated Pair Supports Two End Office Nodes depicts a mated pair of EAGLE 5 ISSs with each EAGLE 5 ISS supporting an End Office Node.

  • Page 633: End Office Support Configuration

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Figure 88: Mated Pair Supports Two End Office Nodes Figure 88: Mated Pair Supports Two End Office Nodes shows that a mated pair of EAGLE 5 ISSs cannot share an End Office Node. Each EAGLE 5 ISS requires its own unique point code and so any attached End Office Nodes share those point codes.

  • Page 634: Adding An End Node Internal Point Code

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Adding an Existing Association to an Existing Application Server procedure in IETF M3UA and SUA Configuration Procedures Routing key matching the user part specified in the Adding an End Node Internal Point Code procedure and with the DPC of the routing key equal to the true point code of the EAGLE 5 ISS (shown in the rtrv-sid output) - See the...
  • Page 635 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway end of a range, and so must be greater than the ssn parameter value. Valid values range from 1 to 255. The specified assignment cannot be an existing assignment, including SSN subsets. 1.
  • Page 636 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway CAPACITY (% FULL): X-LIST ENTRIES ALLOCATED: If the IPC being added to the database is not shown in the rtrv-dstn output, go to the “Adding a Destination Point Code” procedure in the Database Administration Manual - SS7 and add the IPC to the DPC table.

  • Page 637: Removing An End Node Internal Point Code

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Enter the rtrv-rmt-appl command Is the internal point Enter the code shown in the rtrv-dstn command rtrv-dstn output? Go to the "Adding a Destination Point Code" procedure in the Database Administration Manual - SS7 and add the required full destination point code to the database.
  • Page 638 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway The dlt-rmt-appl command uses these parameters: :ipc/ipca/ipci/ipcn/ipcn24 – The end node's internal point code can be an ANSI, ANSI private (ipc/ipca), ITU-I, ITU-I spare, ITU-I private spare (ipci), 14-bit ITU-N, 14-bit ITU-N spare, 14-bit ITU-N private spare (ipcn), or 24-bit ITU-N, or 24-bit ITU-N private (ipcn24) point code.
  • Page 639 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway IPCN SI SSN p-16380 3 250 IPCN24 SI SSN 4. Back up the new changes, using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear; the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first.

  • Page 640: Figure 90: Removing An End Node Internal Point Code

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure End Office Support Gateway Enter the rtrv-rmt-appl command Enter the dlt-rmt-appl command with these mandatory parameters: :ipc/ipca/ipci/ipcn/ipcn24 = <internal Are the si=3, ssn, or point code value> ssne parameters to be :si = 3 specified with the :ssn = <subsystem number>...

  • Page 641: Chapter 6: Ipsg M2Pa And M3Ua Configuration Procedures

    Chapter IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Topics: Chapter 6, IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures, describes the procedures necessary to Adding IPSG Components..643 configure the components necessary to establish IP Adding an IPSG Card..644 connections using M2PA or M3UA associations on IPSG signaling links.
  • Page 642 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Attributes of an IPSG Association..919 Changing the Buffer Size of an IPSG Association..937 Changing the Host Values of an IPSG Association..950 Configuring an IPSG Association for SCTP Retransmission Control..969 Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for IPSG M2PA Associations..978...

  • Page 643: Adding Ipsg Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding IPSG Components This section describes how to configure the components necessary to establish connections using IPSG M2PA associations on IPSG signaling links, and IPSG M3UA associations on IPSG signaling links. The configuration of these connections consists of these items.

  • Page 644: Adding An Ipsg Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway There are two different versions, RFC and Draft 6, of M2PA timer sets that can be assigned to IPSG M2PA associations. Each version of the M2PA timer sets contains 20 timer sets. The values of these timer sets can be changed with the Changing an M2PA Timer Set procedure.
  • Page 645 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway :force – If the global title translation feature is on, the force=yes parameter allows the IPSG card to be added to the database even if the current SCCP transactions-per-second threshold is unable to support the additional SCCP transaction-per-second capacity created by adding the IP card.
  • Page 646 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1115 GSPM EOAM 1116 TDM-B 1117 MDAL 1201 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1203 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1204 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1206 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI nsp3 nsp4 1216 STPLAN 1301 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1302 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI 1303...
  • Page 647 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 07-05-01 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 37.0.0 ENT-SHLF: MASP A - COMPLTD 5. Verify that the card to be entered has been physically installed into the proper location (see the Card Slot Selection section).
  • Page 648 Step Note: The Fan feature must be purchased before you turn this feature on with the chg-feat command. If you are not sure if you have purchased the Fan feature, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative. 9. Enter the rtrv-feat command to verify that the Fan feature is on.
  • Page 649 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 11. The shelf containing the E5-ENET-B card that is being added in this procedure must have fans installed. Verify whether or not fans are installed on the shelf. If the fans are installed, continue the procedure with Step If the fans are not installed on the shelf containing the E5-ENET-B card, go to the Installation Manual...
  • Page 650 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-tps command. What is This 750,000 the maximum total procedure cannot provisioned system be performed. TPS value? Will adding the 500,000 new IPSG card exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS value? See Perform the Activating the HIPR2 High...

  • Page 651: Figure 91: Adding An Ipsg Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the ent-card Enter the rtrv-card command command with these Is the IP with this parameter. mandatory parameters. card being provisioned :loc=<card location specified :loc=<card location>...

  • Page 652: Adding An Ipsg M2Pa Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IPSG M2PA Linkset This procedure is used to configure IPSG M2PA linksets in the EAGLE 5 ISS using the ent-ls commands with these parameters. :lsn – The name of the linkset. The linkset name can contain up to 10 characters, with the first character being a letter.

  • Page 653: Table 47: Signaling Link Fair Share Example

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway threshold is reached when the signaling link’s actual usage exceeds the percentage of the signaling link’s fair share of the linkset’s TPS or the percentage of the IPGWx card’s capacity. A signaling link's fair share of linkset’s TPS is the linkset’s TPS divided by the number of in-service links in the linkset.
  • Page 654 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway HIPR2 High Rate Mode feature. When the HIPR2 High Rate Mode feature is enabled and turned on, the maximum total provisioned system TPS is increased to 750,000. If the maximum total provisioned system TPS is 750,000, or the maximum total provisioned system TPS is 500,000 and will not be increased, and adding the IPSG M2PA linkset will exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS, the IPSG M2PA linkset cannot be added unless the amount of available TPS is reduced enough to...
  • Page 655 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1. Display the current linksets in the database using the rtrv-ls command. This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7)
  • Page 656 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 001-005-000 ----------- no --- -------------- -------------- 001-007-000 ----------- no --- -------------- -------------- 002-002-002 ----------- no --- -------------- -------------- 003-002-004 ----------- no --- -------------- -------------- 003-003-003 ----------- no --- -------------- -------------- 003-003-004...
  • Page 657 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 37.5.0 DPCA RTX-CRITERIA 010-020-005 OPCA 007-008-009 ls1305 001-005-000 008-008-008 ls1307 001-007-000 DESTINATION ENTRIES ALLOCATED: 2000 FULL DPC(s): EXCEPTION DPC(s):...
  • Page 658 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 DPCA ALIASI ALIASN/N24 APCA 010-020-005 ---------- -------------- lsn1 003-003-005 lsn2 003-003-004 RTX:No CLLI=----------- If the adjacent point code of the linkset is not the DPC of a route, the point code entry is displayed in the rtrv-rte output, but the LSN, RC, and APC columns contain dashes, as shown in the following output example.
  • Page 659 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the maximum total provisioned system TPS is 750,000, or the maximum total provisioned system TPS is 500,000 and will not be increased, and adding the IPSG M2PA linkset will exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS, the IPSG M2PA linkset cannot be added unless the amount of available TPS is reduced enough to allow the IPSG M2PA linkset to be added.
  • Page 660 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 LINK LSN SLC TYPE ANAME SLKTPS 1301 A lsniplim IPLIM M2PA 1301 A1 lsniplim IPLIM M2PA...
  • Page 661 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If linksets are not displayed in the rept-stat-iptps output, perform one or more of these actions to increase the available TPS. Note: If one or more of these actions are not performed to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will not allow the IPSG M2PA linkset to be added, the IPSG M2PA linkset cannot be added and the remainder of this procedure cannot be performed.
  • Page 662 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipgwx2 001-001-003 none 1 off off off no SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- ----------- RANDSLS IPSG IPGWAPC...
  • Page 663 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway ---------------- ----------- RANDSLS IPSG IPGWAPC GTTMODE CGGTMOD CdPA ADAPTER RSVDSLKTPS MAXSLKTPS m2pa 4000 TPSALM LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM rsvdslktps 100% 100% LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 1303 A IPSG ipsgm2pa1 1303 A1 IPSG ipsgm2pa2...
  • Page 664 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway whose IPSG value is yes and ADAPTER value is M3UA) to change the MAXSLKTPS value (and RSVDSLKTPS value if necessary) for any linksets shown in the rtrv-ls output. Perform one or both of these actions to increase the available TPS if needed.
  • Page 665 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway ent-ls:lsn=lsgw1107:apca=010-020-005:lst=a:ipsg=yes:rsvdslktps=200:maxslktps=1000 :lsusealm=70:slkusealm=70:adapter=m2pa When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-17 16:23:21 GMT EAGLE5 37.5.0 Link set table is ( 14 of 1024) 1% full ENT-LS: MASP A - COMPLTD 13.
  • Page 666 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The APC of this linkset Enter the rtrv-ls Enter the rtrv-sid cannot be shown in the command. command. rtrv-ls output. Enter the rtrv-dstn command with this Is the parameter: APC of the linkset being Enter the rtrv-dstn...
  • Page 667 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Enter the rtrv-tps Sheet 1 command. Note: The maximum total provisioned system TPS cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS. Will the MAXSLKTPS value for the linkset cause the maximum total provisioned system Sheet 5 TPS value to be...
  • Page 668 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 2 cannot be performed. or 4 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 4 perform? Remove ATM...
  • Page 669 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any From Enter the rept-stat-iptps linksets shown in Sheet 3 command. the rept-stat-iptps output? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. Are any linksets :lsn=<linkset name shown in shown with the value the rept-stat-iptps output>...

  • Page 670: Figure 92: Adding An Ipsg M2Pa Linkset

    See the Other Optional Parameters” section in the Adding an IPSG M2PA Linkset” Procedure in the Database Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway for the procedures that discuss these parameters and their usage. Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter.

  • Page 671: Adding An Ipsg M3Ua Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IPSG M3UA Linkset This procedure is used to configure IPSG M3UA linksets in the EAGLE 5 ISS using the ent-ls command with these parameters. :lsn – The name of the linkset. The linkset name can contain up to 10 characters, with the first character being a letter.

  • Page 672: Table 48: Signaling Link Fair Share Example

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway A signaling link's fair share of linkset’s TPS is the linkset’s TPS divided by the number of in-service links in the linkset. For example, if the linkset TPS is 4000 and there are 4 signaling links in the linkset, all in-service, then the signaling link's fair-share would be 1000 TPS (4000/4=1000).
  • Page 673 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding the IPSG M3UA linkset cannot exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS shown in the rtrv-tps output. An IPSG M3UA linkset uses from 100 to 5000 TPS, as provisioned by the maxslktps parameter.
  • Page 674 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rtrv-ls or rtrv-dstn commands were entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rtrv-ls or rtrv-dstn commands were entered.
  • Page 675 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 3. Display the destination point codes in the database by entering the rtrv-dstn command. This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-12-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 43.0.0 Extended Processing Time may be Required DPCA CLLI...
  • Page 676 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Destination table is (14 of 2000) 1% full Alias table is (0 of 12000) 0% full This point code cannot be a proxy point code (the prx=yes value assigned to the point code) and a proxy point code (a point code value is shown in the PPC column) cannot be assigned to the point code.
  • Page 677 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Choose another adjacent point code value and repeat the procedure from Step Remove all the entries displayed in this step by performing the “Removing a Route Exception Entry”...
  • Page 678 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 3668 3668 Total provisioned System TPS (99668 of 500000) 20% Command Completed. An IPSG M3UA linkset uses 100 to 5000 TPS, as provisioned by the maxslktps parameter. If adding the new IPSG M3UA linkset will not exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 679 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If one or more of these actions are not performed to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will not allow the IPSG M3UA linkset to be added, the IPSG M3UA linkset cannot be added and the remainder of this procedure cannot be performed.
  • Page 680 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway THRESH CONFIG/ CONFIG/ PEAK PEAKTIMESTAMP RSVD ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ipgwx1 100% ---- 32000 3700 4000 10-07-19 09:49:19 RCV: 3650 4000 10-07-19 09:49:19 ipgwx2 100% ---- 16000 4800 5000 10-07-19 09:49:09 RCV: 4850 5000...
  • Page 681 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1101 A SS7IPGW 1102 A SS7IPGW 1103 A SS7IPGW 1104 A SS7IPGW 1105 A SS7IPGW 1106 A SS7IPGW 1107 A SS7IPGW 1108 A SS7IPGW Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. rtrv-ls:lsn=ipgwx2 This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 682 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway CdPA MATELSN IPTPS LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM ---------- 32000 100% Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. rtrv-ls:lsn=ipsglsn This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA...
  • Page 683 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway m2pa 4000 TPSALM LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM rsvdslktps 100% 100% LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 1303 B3 IPSG ipsgm2pa6 Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. Perform one or both of these actions as necessary. Perform the Configuring an IPGWx Linkset procedure to change the IPTPS value for any linksets...
  • Page 684 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The ipgwapc, iptps, mtprse, multgc, spc/spca/spci/spcn/spcn24, ppc/ppca/ppci/ppcn/ppcn24, and sapci/sapcn/sapcn24 parameters cannot be specified for an IPSG M3UA linkset. These optional parameters can be specified with the ent-ls command. lsusealm - the linkset’s IP TPS alarm threshold.
  • Page 685 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is ( 14 of 1024) 1% full 14. Back up the new changes using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first.
  • Page 686 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ls Enter the rtrv-dstn command. command. Perform the Adding a Destination Point Code” procedure to add the Is the The APC of this linkset required point code to the APC of the cannot be shown in the database.
  • Page 687 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Enter the rtrv-tps Sheet 1 command. Note: The maximum total provisioned system TPS cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS. Will the MAXSLKTPS value for the linkset cause the maximum total provisioned system Sheet 5 TPS value to be...
  • Page 688 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 2 cannot be performed. or 4 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 4 perform? Remove ATM...
  • Page 689 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any From Enter the rept-stat-iptps linksets shown in Sheet 3 command. the rept-stat-iptps output? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. Are any linksets :lsn=<linkset name shown in shown with the value the rept-stat-iptps output>...

  • Page 690: Figure 93: Adding An Ipsg M3Ua Linkset

    See the Other Optional Parameters” section in the Adding an IPSG M3UA Linkset” Procedure in the Database Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway for the procedures that discuss these parameters and their usage. Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter.

  • Page 691: Configuring An Ip Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Configuring an IP Link This procedure is used to configure the link parameters for IP cards using the chg-ip-lnk command. These link parameters are used to configure the Ethernet hardware. The chg-ip-lnk command uses the following parameters.

  • Page 692: Table 49: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The IP address and subnet mask values cannot be changed to an address representing a different network if: If the network interface specified by the loc and port parameters has a default router, dnsa, or dsnb parameter values assigned to it, as shown in the rtrv-ip-card output.
  • Page 693 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Network Class IP Network Address Range Valid Subnet Mask Values 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 If a Class B IP address is specified for the ipaddr parameter of the chg-ip-lnk command, the subnet address that results from the ipaddr and submask parameter values cannot be the same as the subnet address that results from the pvn and pvnmask , fcna and fcnamask, or fcnb and fcnbmask parameter values of the chg-netopts command.
  • Page 694 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2105 --------------- --------------- HALF 2205 192.1.1.30 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF 2213 192.1.1.50 255.255.255.0 FULL 2213 --------------- --------------- HALF 2301 192.1.1.52 255.255.255.0...
  • Page 695 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 4. Retrieve the status of the signaling links assigned to the IP card to be changed using the rept-stat-slk command. For example, enter this command. rept-stat-slk:loc=1201:link=a The output lists the signaling link assigned to this card: rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 1201,A...
  • Page 696 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway IMT BUS A = Conn IMT BUS B = Conn CURRENT TEMPERATURE 32C ( 90F) [ALARM TEMP: 60C (140F)] PEAK TEMPERATURE: 39C (103F) [06-05-02 13:40] SIGNALING LINK STATUS CLLI IS-NR nc001...
  • Page 697 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 150.1.1.1 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN --------------- SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- If the rtrv-ip-card output shows an IP address for the default router (DEFROUTER) whose network portion matches the network portion of the IP address being changed, perform the Configuring an IP Card procedure and change the IP address of the default router to 0.0.0.0.
  • Page 698 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway or fcnb and fcnbmask parameter values of the chg-netopts command. Continue the procedure with Step 13. Display the associations referencing the local host name that is associated with the IP link being changed by entering the rtrv-assoc command and specifying the local host name shown in the rtrv-ip-host output in Step...
  • Page 699 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:20:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Card has been allowed. 17. Verify the in-service normal (IS-NR) status of the IP card using the rept-stat-card command. For example, enter this command.
  • Page 700 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the ipaddr or submask values were not changed, continue the procedure with Step Note: If the IP address of the default router was not changed to 0.0.0.0 in Step 10 , continue the Step...
  • Page 701 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk command Is the ipaddr=0.0.0.0 parameter to be specified with the chg-ip-lnk command? Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter. :display=all Is the current IP address of the IP link shown in the rtrv-ip-host output?
  • Page 702 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Is the state of the signaling link OOS-MT-DSBLD? Enter the dact-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card Enter the location of the signaling link>...
  • Page 703 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Are the ipaddr or submask paramter values being Sheet 6 changed? Enter the rtrv-ip-card command with the loc value of the IP link being changed Is the IP address being changed to a Sheet 4...
  • Page 704 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Does the defrouter parameter have a value assigned? Does the network portion of the defrouter parameter match the network portion of the IP address not being changed or the new IP address? Enter the...
  • Page 705 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 3 or 4 Is a Class B IP address to be specified for the new IP address of the IP link? Enter the rtrv-netopts command Is error message E3967 displayed? Choose values for the ipaddr and...
  • Page 706 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Was a local From host removed on Sheet 1 Sheets 3 with the "Removing an IP or 5 Host" procedure? Enter the rtrv-assoc command with the lhost value shown in the rtrv-ip-host output from Sheet 1 Does the rtrv-assoc output show...
  • Page 707 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 6 Enter the chg-ip-lnk command with these mandatory parameters: :loc=<card location of the link> :port=<the ethernet interface on the card, A or B> and with at least one of these optional parameters: :ipaddr = <IP address>...
  • Page 708 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 7 Was the state of the signaling link changed on Sheet 2? Enter the act-slk:loc=<card location of the signaling link> :link=<signaling link assigned to the card> command Enter the rept-stat-slk:loc=<card Were the ipaddr or...
  • Page 709 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 8 Was an IP route removed on Sheets 3 or 4? Perform the "Adding an IP Route" procedure and add the IP route back to the database Was the open parameter value changed for...

  • Page 710: Adding An Ip Host

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IP Host This procedure associates hostnames with IP addresses using the ent-ip-host command. The ent-ip-host command uses the following parameters. :host– The host name to be associated with the IP address. This parameter identifies the logical name assigned to the device with the IP address indicated.
  • Page 711 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2101 192.1.1.20 255.255.255.0 FULL 2101 --------------- --------------- HALF 2103 192.1.1.22 255.255.255.0 FULL 2103 --------------- --------------- HALF 2105 192.1.1.24 255.255.255.0 FULL 2105 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF...

  • Page 712: Figure 95: Adding An Ip Host

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rtrv-ip-host command with this parameter.

  • Page 713: Configuring An Ip Card

    IP addresses consist of the system’s network number and the machine’s unique host number. :domain – The domain name is used to construct a fully-qualified DNS name consisting of 120 characters or less. For example, a domain name can be tekelec.com, the hostname is john.doe. The fully-qualified DNS name would be john.doe@tekelec.com.
  • Page 714 --------------- SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1203 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1205 SRCHORDR SRVRONLY DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM...
  • Page 715 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- To change the parameters of an IP card, the signaling link to the card and the card have to be inhibited. 2. Display the signaling link associated with the card shown in Step 1 using the rtrv-slk command specifying the card location.
  • Page 716 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The output displays the link status as OOS-MT-DSBLD and gives off a minor alarm: rlghncxa03w 06-10-27 17:00:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 1201,A nc001 ----------- OOS-MT-DSBLD AVAIL ALARM STATUS = * 0236 REPT-LKS:not aligned UNAVAIL REASON = NA Command Completed.
  • Page 717 10. To change the sctpcsum parameter value for the IP card, the sctpcsum parameter value in the rtrv-sg-opts output must be percard. Verify the sctpcsum parameter value by entering the rtrv-sg-opts command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-13 09:19:43 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 SRKQ: 1500 SNMPCONT: tekelec 910-6278-001 Revision A, January 2012...
  • Page 718 08-06-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 39.0.0 LOC 1201 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 192.1.1.40 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER --------------- DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM adler32 BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- Note: If Step 7 was not performed, continue the procedure with Step 13. Allow the IP card that was inhibited in Step 7 by using the alw-card command.
  • Page 719 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:22:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Card has been allowed. 14. Verify the in-service normal (IS-NR) status of the IP card using the rept-stat-card command. For example, enter this command.
  • Page 720 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP.
  • Page 721 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Is the state of From rept-stat-card:loc=<card the card Sheet 1 location> command OOS-MT-DSBLD? Enter the Enter the rept-stat-card:loc=<card inh-card:loc=<card location> command location> command Is the defrouter parameter to be specified with the chg-ip-card command?
  • Page 722 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Will the sctpcsum parameter value be Sheet 4 changed? Enter the Enter the rtrv-assoc command rtrv-sg-opts command with this parameter: :aname=<the name of the association shown in the ANAME column in the rtrv-slk output on Sheet 1>...

  • Page 723: Figure 96: Configuring An Ip Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Enter the Notes: chg-ip-card:loc=<card location> command 1. Either the domain or rstdomain parameters can with at least one of these parameters: be specified, but not both. :srchordr = <local, srvr, srvronly>...

  • Page 724: Adding An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IP Route This procedure is used to add an IP route to the database using the ent-ip-rte command. The ent-ip-rte command uses these parameters. :loc – The location of the IP card that the IP route will be assigned to. :dest –...

  • Page 725: Table 51: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Table 51: Valid Subnet Mask Parameter Values Network Class IP Network Address Range Valid Subnet Mask Values 255.0.0.0 (the default value for a class A IP address) 255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.240.0.0...
  • Page 726 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-08-28 21:17:37 GMT EAGLE5 39.0.0 LOC 1212 SRCHORDR LOCAL DNSA 150.1.1.1 DNSB --------------- DEFROUTER 150.1.1.100 DOMAIN NC. TEKELEC. COM SCTPCSUM crc32c BPIPADDR --------------- BPSUBMASK --------------- LOC 1301 SRCHORDR SRVRONLY DNSA 140.188.13.10 DNSB 140.190.15.28...
  • Page 727 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Display the pvn, pvnmask, fcna, fcnamask, fcnb, and fcnbmask parameter values of the chg-netopts command by entering the rtrv-netoptscommand. If error message E3967 Cmd Rej: E5IS must be on is displayed after the rtrv-netopts command is executed, the pvn, pvnmask, fcna, fcnamask, fcnb, and fcnbmask parameters are not configured.
  • Page 728 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Enter the rtrv-ip-rte command rtrv-ip-card command Perform the "Adding an IPSG Card" procedure in Is the required this chapter to add the IP card in the required IP card to the database? database...

  • Page 729: Figure 97: Adding An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the ent-ip-rte command with these parameters: :loc=<IP card location> :dest = <IP address of the remote host or network> :submask = <subnet mask of the destination IP address>...

  • Page 730: Adding An Ipsg M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IPSG M2PA Association This procedure is used to configure IPSG M2PA associations using the ent-assoc command. The combination of a local host, local SCTP port, remote host and remote SCTP port defines an association. IPSG M2PA associations are assigned to E5-ENET cards running the IPSG application (IPSG cards).
  • Page 731 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The size of the buffers on the IPSG cards is 3200 KB. The size of the buffers assigned to each association that is assigned to the IPSG card cannot exceed the maximum buffer size for the IPSG card. When a new association is added, the default buffer size for the association is assigned to the association.
  • Page 732 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered. To enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx> command, the terminal must allow Security Administration commands to be entered from it and the user must be allowed to enter Security Administration commands.
  • Page 733 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT LINK ADAPTER LPORT RPORT OPEN ALW assoc3 1203 M2PA 2048 1030...
  • Page 734 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 192.1.1.50 DN-MSC1 192.1.1.52 DN-MSC2 REMOTE IPADDR REMOTE HOST 150.1.1.5 NCDEPTECONOMIC_DEVELOPMENT. SOUTHEASTERN_COORIDOR_ASHVL. GOV IP Host table is (11 of 2048) 1% full The IP address of the IP link should be assigned to the local host name that will be assigned to the association.
  • Page 735 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 75000 ------ 15000 25000 500 4500 1600 1400 6000 9500 350000 ------ 60000 70000 600 10000 6000 2000 500000 500 10000 150000 ------ 55000 35000 500 3500 5750 1500 125000 440 175000 ------ 12500 45000 500...
  • Page 736 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1000 ------ 1000 1000 1000 200 M2PA RFC Timers (in msec, T16 in microsec) TSET T1 6000 75000 5000 20000 500 5000 4000 1000 100000 150 7500 8000 1500 2000...
  • Page 737 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway ent-assoc:aname=assoc2:lhost=gw107.nc.tekelec.com:lport=2000: rhost=gw100.nc.tekelec.com:rport=1030:adapter=m2pa These are the rules that apply to adding IPSG M2PA associations. 1. The EAGLE 5 ISS can contain a maximum of 4000 connections (association – application server assignments).
  • Page 738 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock table is (5 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (400 KB of 1600 KB) on LOC = 1203 10. Back up the new changes, using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear;...
  • Page 739 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command. Note: The IP link is shown by the entries in the CARD LOC and IPLINK PORT columns. The ADAPTER value of the association must be M2PA .
  • Page 740 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Enter the Sheet 1 rtrv-ip-lnk command. Perform the "Configuring Is the required an IP Link" procedure in IP link in the IP Link this chapter to add the table? required IP link.
  • Page 741 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Enter the Sheet 1 rtrv-m2pa-tset command. Perform the "Changing an Is the desired M2PA Timer Set " procedure in M2PA timer set this chapter and change the defined with the desired desired timer set with the values? See...

  • Page 742: Figure 98: Adding An Ipsg M2Pa Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Enter the ent-assoc command with these mandatory parameters. :aname=<association name> :lhost = <local host name from the rtrv-ip-host output> and with at least one of these optional parameters: :lport = <local port ID>...

  • Page 743: Adding An Ipsg M3Ua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IPSG M3UA Association This procedure is used to configure IPSG M3UA associations using the ent-assoc command. The combination of a local host, local SCTP port, remote host and remote SCTP port defines an association. IPSG M3UA associations are assigned to E5-ENET cards running the IPSG application (IPSG cards).
  • Page 744 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway new association is added, the default buffer size for the association is assigned to the association. If adding the new association causes the total buffer size for all the associations on the IPSG card to exceed the maximum buffer size for that IPSG card, the ent-assoc command will be rejected.
  • Page 745 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway command. The user’s permissions can be verified with the rtrv-user or rtrv-secu-user commands. For more information about the canc-cmd command, go to the Commands Manual. 1. Display the associations in the database using the rtrv-assoc command. This is an example of possible output.
  • Page 746 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (4 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (200 KB of 800 KB) on LOC = 1203 An IPSG card can contain a maximum of 32 IPSG M2PA or M3UA associations. If 32 associations are displayed in the rtrv-assoc output, the new IPSG M3UA association cannot be added to this card.
  • Page 747 Changing the Buffer Size of an IPSG Association procedure. 7. Add the associations using the ent-assoc command. For this example, enter these commands. ent-assoc:aname=assoc1:lhost=gw105.nc.tekelec.com:lport=1030: rhost=gw100.nc.tekelec.com:rport=1030:adapter=m3ua These are the rules that apply to adding IPSG M3UA associations. 1. The EAGLE 5 ISS can contain a maximum of 4000 connections (association – application server assignments).
  • Page 748 7. For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1305 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST gw105.nc.tekelec.com ALHOST RHOST gw100.nc.tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 1030 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE...
  • Page 749 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Is the required IP link shown in the Enter the rtrv-assoc output? See rtrv-ip-lnk command Note 1. Is the required IP link in the IP Link table? Enter the Perform the...

  • Page 750: Figure 99: Adding An Ipsg M3Ua Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Was a new host From name added on Sheet 1 Sheet 1? Enter the Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this ent-assoc command with these mandatory parameters: parameter. :aname=<association name>...

  • Page 751: Adding An Ipsg M2Pa Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IPSG M2PA Signaling Link This procedure is used to add an IPSG M2PA signaling link to the database using the ent-slk command. An IPSG M2PA signaling link is a signaling link that is assigned to an IPSG card and that contains an IPSG linkset and IPSG association whose ADAPTER value is M2PA.
  • Page 752 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway To provision a EAGLE 5 ISS with more than 1200 signaling links, the EAGLE 5 ISS must have certain Requirements for EAGLE 5 ISSs Containing more than 1200 Signaling levels of hardware installed.
  • Page 753 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway For more information about the canc-cmd command, go to the Commands Manual. 1. Display the maximum number of signaling links the EAGLE 5 ISS can have and the number of signaling links that are currently provisioned by entering the rtrv-tbl-capacity command.
  • Page 754 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway LINK LSN SLC TYPE 1201 A ipgwx2 SS7IPGW 1202 A ipgwx2 SS7IPGW 1203 A ipgwx2 SS7IPGW 1204 A ipgwx2 SS7IPGW 1205 A ipgwx2 SS7IPGW 1206 A ipgwx2 SS7IPGW 1101 A ipgwx1...
  • Page 755 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 4. Display the signaling links assigned to the IPSG card by entering the rtrv-slk command with the card location of the IPSG card. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-slk:loc=2204 This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 756 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the signaling link will be assigned to an existing IPSG card, the RSVDSLKTPS value that is assigned to the linkset will be assigned to the signaling link. The sum of the TPS used by all the signaling links that are assigned to the IPSG card cannot exceed 5000 TPS.
  • Page 757 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the IPSG value of the linkset is yes, and the ADAPTER value is m2pa, continue the procedure by performing one of these actions. If a new IPSG card was added in Step 3, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 758 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway the amount of available TPS is reduced enough to allow the IPSG M2PA signaling link to be added. The available TPS can be increased by performing one or more of these actions. Some ATM high-speed signaling links have to be removed.
  • Page 759 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If linksets are displayed in the rept-stat-iptps output in Step 5, continue the procedure with Step If linksets are not displayed in the rept-stat-iptps output in Step 5, an IPLIMx card that contains signaling links has to be removed.
  • Page 760 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipgwx1 001-001-002 none 1...
  • Page 761 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. rtrv-ls:lsn=ipgwx3 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS...
  • Page 762 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipsglsn2 005-005-005 none 1...

  • Page 763: Table 54: Ipsg M2Pa Signaling Link Parameter Combinations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (7 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (1400 KB of 6400 KB) on LOC = 2204 Associations that can be assigned to an IPSG M2PA signaling link cannot be assigned to a signaling link shown by dashes in the LINK column, and the ADAPTER value of the association must be M2PA.
  • Page 764 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway rst-card:loc=2205 When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-23 13:05:05 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Card has been allowed. 15. Activate all signaling links on the cards using the act-slk command, specifying the card location and link parameter value of each signaling link.
  • Page 765 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-tbl-capacity command. Will the addition What is the of the signaling link 2800 maximum number of signaling exceed the maximum number of links the EAGLE 5 ISS can signaling links the EAGLE have? 5 ISS can have?
  • Page 766 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the desired From Enter the rept-stat-iptps linkset shown in the Sheet 1 command rept-stat-iptps output? Perform the "Adding an Enter the rtrv-ls command IPSG M2PA Linkset " with this parameter.
  • Page 767 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Will adding the new signaling link exceed From Enter the rtrv-tps the maximum total provisioned Sheet 2 command. Sheet 6 system TPS value? See the Note on Sheet 2. Note: The maximum total provisioned system TPS cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS.
  • Page 768 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 3 cannot be performed. or 5 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 5 perform? Remove ATM...
  • Page 769 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any linksets shown in From the rept-stat-iptps Sheet 4 output on Sheet 2? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. Are any linksets :lsn=<linkset name shown in shown with the value the rept-stat-iptps output>...

  • Page 770: Figure 100: Adding An Ipsg M2Pa Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Are any entries From with this parameter. shown in the rtrv-assoc Sheets 2, 3, :loc=<the location of the IPSG output? See 4, or 5 card that the signaling link will the Note.

  • Page 771: Adding An Ipsg M3Ua Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding an IPSG M3UA Signaling Link This procedure is used to add an IPSG M3UA signaling link to the database using the ent-slk command. An IPSG M3UA signaling link is a signaling link that is assigned to an IPSG card and that contains an IPSG linkset and IPSG association whose ADAPTER value is M3UA.
  • Page 772 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway To provision a EAGLE 5 ISS with more than 1200 signaling links, the EAGLE 5 ISS must have certain Requirements for EAGLE 5 ISSs Containing more than 1200 Signaling levels of hardware installed.
  • Page 773 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd without the trm parameter at the terminal where the rept-stat-slk, rtrv-ls, or rtrv-slk commands were entered. Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rept-stat-slk, rtrv-ls, or rtrv-slk commands were entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rept-stat-slk, rtrv-ls, or rtrv-slk commands was entered.
  • Page 774 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1303 B1 ipsglsn IPSG ipsgm2pa3 1303 A2 ipsglsn IPSG ipsgm2pa4 1303 A3 ipsglsn IPSG ipsgm2pa5 1303 B3 ipsglsn2 IPSG ipsgm2pa6 1000 1307 A ipsglsn IPSG m2pa2 2204 B lsnlp2 IPSG m3ua...
  • Page 775 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1305 LIMATM ATMANSI lsnds0 1306 LIME1ATM ATMITU lsnituatm 1307 ENET IPSG ipsglsn 1311 IPLIM 1312 LIMDS0 SS7ANSI lsnds0 If the required IPSG card is not in the database, perform the Adding an IPSG Card procedure and add the IPSG card to the database.
  • Page 776 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Command Completed. If the desired linkset is shown in the rept-stat-iptps output, continue the procedure with Step If the desired linkset is not shown in the rept-stat-iptps output, add the linkset by performing Adding an IPSG M2PA Linkset procedure.
  • Page 777 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway RCONTEXT ASNOTIF NUMSLKALW NUMSLKRSTR NUMSLKPROH none LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 1317 A IPSG m3ua20 Link set table is (13 of 1024) 1% full. If the IPSG value of the linkset is no, choose another linkset and repeat this procedure from Step If the IPSG value of the linkset is yes and the ADAPTER value is m2pa, choose another linkset and repeat this procedure from...
  • Page 778 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If adding the new IPSG M3UA signaling link will exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS, and the maximum total provisioned system TPS is 500,000 shown, perform the "Activating the HIPR2 High Rate Mode Feature"...
  • Page 779 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If ATM high-speed signaling links are not displayed in the rtrv-slk output, perform one or more of these actions to increase the available TPS. Note: If one or more of these actions are not performed to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will not allow the IPSG M3UA signaling link to be added, the IPSG M3UA signaling link cannot be added and the remainder of this procedure cannot be performed.
  • Page 780 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If you do not wish to perform other actions to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will Step allow the IPSG M3UA signaling link to be added, continue the procedure with 10.
  • Page 781 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway LINK SLC TYPE 1111 A SS7IPGW 1112 A SS7IPGW 1201 A SS7IPGW 1202 A SS7IPGW 1203 A SS7IPGW 1204 A SS7IPGW 1205 A SS7IPGW 1206 A SS7IPGW Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full.
  • Page 782 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1303 B1 IPSG ipsgm2pa3 1303 A2 IPSG ipsgm2pa4 1303 A3 IPSG ipsgm2pa5 1307 A IPSG m2pa2 Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. rtrv-ls:lsn=ipsglsn2 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS...
  • Page 783 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-17 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT LINK ADAPTER LPORT RPORT OPEN ALW m3ua2 2204 M3UA 3001 3000 m3ua3...
  • Page 784 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway RANDSLS IPSG IPGWAPC GTTMODE CGGTMOD CdPA ADAPTER RSVDSLKTPS MAXSLKTPS m3ua 4000 TPSALM LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM rsvdslktps 100% RCONTEXT ASNOTIF NUMSLKALW NUMSLKRSTR NUMSLKPROH LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 2204 A IPSG m3ua4 Link set table is (13 of 1024) 1% full.
  • Page 785 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway m3ua3 002-002-005 none 1 off off off no SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- ----------- RANDSLS IPSG IPGWAPC GTTMODE CGGTMOD CdPA ADAPTER RSVDSLKTPS MAXSLKTPS m3ua 4000 TPSALM LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM rsvdslktps 100%...

  • Page 786: Table 55: Ipsg M3Ua Signaling Link Parameter Combinations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway in this step contains a unique routing context value, compared to the routing context values shown Step 13, continue the procedure with Step If the linkset displayed in this step does not contain a unique routing context value, perform the Changing an IPSG M3UA Linkset procedure to change the routing context value in this linkset that Step...
  • Page 787 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-23 13:05:05 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 Card has been allowed. 18. Activate all signaling links on the cards using the act-slk command, specifying the card location and link parameter value of each signaling link.
  • Page 788 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-tbl-capacity command. Will the addition What is the of the signaling link 2800 maximum number of signaling exceed the maximum number of links the EAGLE 5 ISS can signaling links the EAGLE have? 5 ISS can have?
  • Page 789 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the desired From Enter the rept-stat-iptps linkset shown in the Sheet 1 command rept-stat-iptps output? Perform the "Adding an Enter the rtrv-ls command IPSG M3UA Linkset" with this parameter.
  • Page 790 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Will adding the new signaling link exceed From Enter the rtrv-tps the maximum total provisioned Sheet 2 command. Sheet 6 system TPS value? See the Note on Sheet 2. Note: The maximum total provisioned system TPS cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS.
  • Page 791 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 3 cannot be performed. or 5 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 5 perform? Remove ATM...
  • Page 792 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any linksets shown in From the rept-stat-iptps Sheet 4 output on Sheet 2? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. Are any linksets :lsn=<linkset name shown in shown with the value the rept-stat-iptps output>...
  • Page 793 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Are any entries From with this parameter. shown in the rtrv-assoc Sheets 3, :loc=<the location of the IPSG output? See 4, or 5 card that the signaling link will the Note.

  • Page 794: Figure 101: Adding An Ipsg M3Ua Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 6 Enter the ent-slk command. Use the IPSG M3UA Signaling Link Parameter Combinations table in the Adding an IPSG M3UA Signaling Link” procedure in Enter the rtrv-slk command with these the Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure parameters for each signaling link added Gateway as a guide to determine which parameters...

  • Page 795: Adding A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Adding a Network Appearance The network appearance field identifies the SS7 network context for the message, for the purpose of logically separating the signaling traffic between the SGP (signaling gateway process) and the ASP (application server process) over a common SCTP (stream control transmission protocol) association.
  • Page 796 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway CPCN 02091 02092 02094 02097 02191 02192 11177 Step If the desired group code is shown in the rtrv-sid output, continue the procedure with 3. Display the secondary point codes in the database with the rtrv-spc command. This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 797 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Zero entries found. The following features have expired temporary keys: Feature Name Partnum Zero entries found. If the ITU National and International Spare Point Code Support feature is not enabled, perform the “Activating the ITU National and International Spare Point Code Support feature”...
  • Page 798 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-na command Is the gc parameter Enter the rtrv-sid to be specified? command Is the desired gc parameter value shown in the rtrv-sid output? Enter the rtrv-spc command Is the desired gc parameter value shown in...
  • Page 799 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the ituis or From ituns parameters Sheet 1 to be specified? Are ITU-I spare or 14-bit ITU-N spare network appearances are shown in the rtrv-na output on Sheet 1? Was the rtrv-sid Are spare point...

  • Page 800: Figure 102: Adding A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Notes: Enter the ent-na command with these mandatory 1. The group code value (gc) must be shown in parameters: the rtrv-sid or rtrv-spc output. :na=<0 - 4294967295>...

  • Page 801: Activating The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    The enable-ctrl-feat command enables the controlled feature by inputting the controlled feature’s access key and the controlled feature’s part number with these parameters: :fak – The feature access key provided by Tekelec. The feature access key contains 13 alphanumeric characters and is not case sensitive.
  • Page 802 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature is enabled and turned on. UIMs are displayed when most of these circumstances occur. These UIMs are: UIM 1333 – Displayed when a large message is received on an M3UA association and the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature is not enabled or is enabled and turned off.
  • Page 803 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the rtrv-ctrl-feat output in Step 1 shows any controlled features, continue this procedure with Step 6. If the rtrv-ctrl-feat output shows only the HC-MIM SLK Capacity feature with a quantity of 64, Step 2 through...
  • Page 804 Note: A temporary feature access key cannot be specified to enable this feature. Note: The values for the feature access key (the fak parameter) are provided by Tekelec. If you do not have the feature access key for the feature you wish to enable, contact your Tekelec Sales Representative or Account Representative.
  • Page 805 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 9. Back up the new changes using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete.
  • Page 806 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Sheet 1 of 4 Are any controlled From features shown in the Sheet 1 rtrv-ctrl-feat output? (See Note 1) Enter the rtrv-serial-num command Is the EAGLE 5 ISS's serial number in the database correct and is the serial number locked? Sheet 4...
  • Page 807 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the ent-serial-num Is the EAGLE command with these From 5 ISS's serial number parameters: Sheet 2 in the database :serial=<EAGLE 5 ISS's correct? serial number> :lock=yes Sheet 4 Is the EAGLE 5 ISS's serial number...

  • Page 808: Figure 103: Activating The Large Msu Support For Ip Signaling Feature

    Notes: 1. If you do not have the feature access key for the Large MSU Support for IP Signaling feature, contact your Tekelec sales representative or account representative. 2. This feature can only be permanently enabled. Enter the...

  • Page 809: Removing Ipsg Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing IPSG Components This section describes how to remove the following components from the database. An IPSG Card – Perform the Removing an IPSG Card procedure An IPSG Linkset – Perform the Removing an IPSG Linkset procedure An IP Host –...
  • Page 810 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-ls:lsn=ipsgnode1 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-13 17:00:02 GMT 38.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipsgnode1 001-001-003...
  • Page 811 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway After the signaling links have been removed from the database, continue the procedure with Step 3. Remove the card from the database using the dlt-card command. The dlt-card command has only one parameter, loc, which is the location of the card. For this example, enter these commands.

  • Page 812: Removing An Ipsg Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command Enter the rtrv-ls command with The card being removed in this this parameter: procedure must be running the :lsn=<the name of the linkset IPSG application.
  • Page 813 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The dlt-ls command has only one parameter, lsn, which is the name of the linkset to be removed from the database. The linkset to be removed must exist in the database. To remove a linkset, all links associated with the linkset must be removed.
  • Page 814 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 07-05-17 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 37.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS 240-012-004 scr1 1 off off off yes...
  • Page 815 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 4. Display the attributes of the APC of the linkset being removed by entering the rtrv-dstn command with the APC of the linkset. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-dstn:dpca=150-001-002 This is an example of the possible output.
  • Page 816 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway DESTINATION ENTRIES ALLOCATED: 2000 FULL DPC(s): EXCEPTION DPC(s): NETWORK DPC(s): CLUSTER DPC(s): TOTAL DPC(s): CAPACITY (% FULL): ALIASES ALLOCATED: 12000 ALIASES USED: CAPACITY (% FULL): X-LIST ENTRIES ALLOCATED: If the linkset being removed in this procedure is not assigned to a route exception table entry, no entries are displayed in the rtrv-rtx output, but a summary of the point code quanties is displayed.
  • Page 817 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-10 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 CDPA CGPA ANSI TT SSN SELID LSN GTTSET GTTSET 180 -- any none ----- (--- ) cdgta4...
  • Page 818 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If you wish to remove the proxy linkset that contains the proxy point code that is also assigned to the APC of the linkset, and the database contains other linksets that are assigned to this APC, these other linksets must be removed before the proxy linkset that contains the proxy point code that is also assigned to the APC of the linkset can be removed.
  • Page 819 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rept-stat-iptps command Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. :lsn=<the name of the linkset that will be removed, shown in the rept-stat-iptps output> Perform the Removing a Linkset Containing SS7 What is the Signaling Links”...
  • Page 820 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 1 or 7 Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. :apc/apca/apci/apcn/apcn24=<the APC of the linkset being removed> Enter the rtrv-dstn command with this parameter: :dpc/dpca/dpci/dpcn/dpcn24=<the APC of the linkset being removed>...
  • Page 821 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-rte command with From this parameter. Sheets 1 :lsn=<name of the linkset being or 2 removed> Is the linkset being removed assigned to any routes? Perform the the Removing a Route”...
  • Page 822 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-rtx command with From this parameter. Sheet 3 :lsn=<name of the linkset being removed> Is the linkset that is being removed shown in Sheet 5 the rtrv-rtx output? Do you wish to change the name...
  • Page 823 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ctrl-feat From command with this Sheet 4 parameter. :partnum=893027701 Is the Flexible Linkset Optional Based Routing feature enabled and turned on? Enter the rtrv-gttsel command with this parameter.
  • Page 824 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the dlt-ls command with From this parameter. Sheet 5 :lsn=<name of the linkset being removed> Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. :lsn=<name of the linkset used in the dlt-ls output>...

  • Page 825: Figure 105: Removing An Ipsg Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 6 Did the proxy linkset contain the proxy point code that was assigned to the APC of the linkset? Do you wish to remove the proxy linkset that contains the proxy point code that was assigned to the APC of the linkset?

  • Page 826: Removing An Ip Host Assigned To An Ipsg Card

    KC-HLR2 192.1.1.50 DN-MSC1 192.1.1.52 DN-MSC2 192.3.3.33 GW100. NC. TEKELEC. COM REMOTE IPADDR REMOTE HOST 150.1.1.5 NCDEPTECONOMIC_DEVELOPMENT. SOUTHEASTERN_COORIDOR_ASHVL. GOV IP Host table is (12 of 2048) 1% full If the IP host that is being removed is a remote host, continue the procedure with...
  • Page 827 4. Display the associations referencing the host name being removed in this procedure by entering the rtrv-assoc command with the local host name. For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:lhost=gw100.nc.tekelec.com The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0...
  • Page 828 5. Delete IP host information from the database by entering the dlt-ip-host command. For example, enter these commands. dlt-ip-host:host=gw100.nc.tekelec.com dlt-ip-host:host="ipnode2-1201" When these commands have successfully completed, the following message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:19:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 DLT-IP-HOST: MASP A - COMPLTD 6.
  • Page 829 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP.

  • Page 830: Figure 106: Removing An Ip Host Assigned To An Ipsg Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Change the local host name for the associations referencing the host name Do you wish being removed by to remove the performing the Changing associations? the Host Values of an IPSG Association”...

  • Page 831: Removing An Ip Route

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing an IP Route This procedure is used to remove an IP route from the database using the dlt-ip-rte command. The dlt-ip-rte command uses these parameters. :loc – The location of the IP card containing the IP route being removed. :dest –...
  • Page 832 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Command Completed. Note: If the output of Step 2 shows that the IP card’s state is not OOS-MT-DSBLD, and you do not wish to change the state of the IP card, continue the procedure with Step 3.
  • Page 833 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 7. Back up the new changes using the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command. These messages should appear, the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete.

  • Page 834: Removing An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ip-rte command Enter the rept-stat-card:loc=<location of IP card containing the IP route being removed> command Is the state of the IP card OOS-MT-DSBLD? Do you wish to Enter the place the IP card in the inh-card:loc=<IP card...
  • Page 835 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The dlt-assoc command uses one parameter, aname, the name of the association being removed from the database. The association being removed must be in the database. The open parameter must be set to no before the association can be removed. Use the chg-assoc command to change the value of the open parameter.
  • Page 836 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-03-06 15:17:20 EST EAGLE5 38.0.0 CARD TYPE APPL LSET NAME LINK SLC LSET NAME LINK SLC 1201 ENET IPSG lsn2 rtrv-card:loc=1203 This is an example of possible output.
  • Page 837 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 5. Verify the changes using the rtrv-assoc command with the name of the association specified Step For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 rtrv-assoc:aname=swbel32 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 No matching entries found IP Appl Sock table is (2 of 4000) 1% full...
  • Page 838 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: The ADAPTER value assigned to :loc = <the location of the card the association must be either containing the association that will be M2PA or M3UA.

  • Page 839: Figure 108: Removing An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the chg-assoc command with these parameters: What is the value of :aname=<the name of the the open parameter? association that is being removed> :open=no Enter the dlt-assoc command with this parameter:...

  • Page 840: Removing An Ipsg M2Pa Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing an IPSG M2PA Signaling Link This procedure is used to remove an IPSG M2PA signaling link from the database using the dlt-slk command. The dlt-slk command uses these parameters. :loc –...
  • Page 841 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Press the F9 function key on the keyboard at the terminal where the rtrv-slk command was entered. Enter the canc-cmd without the trm parameter at the terminal where the rtrv-slk command was entered.
  • Page 842 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway For this example, enter these commands. rtrv-ls:lsn=ls04 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-17 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ls04...
  • Page 843 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the LSRESTRICT option is on and the number of signaling links assigned to the linkset will be equal to or greater than the value of the tfatcabmlq parameter value of the linkset if the signaling link is removed, the "Configuring the Restricted Linkset Option"...
  • Page 844 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-23 13:06:25 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 2204,A ls04 ls04clli OOS-MT Unavail ---- ALARM STATUS 0235 REPT-LNK-MGTINH: local inhibited UNAVAIL REASON = LI 9.
  • Page 845 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- ----------- IPSG IPGWAPC GTTMODE CGGTMOD CdPA ADAPTER SLKTPS LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM RCONTEXT ASNOTIF m2pa 100% none LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 1102 A IPSG assoc1 Link set table is (22 of 1024) 2% full.
  • Page 846 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this rtrv-slk command with this parameter. parameter. :loc = <location of the signaling :type=ipsg link being removed> What is the Do you wish to M2PA M3UA...

  • Page 847: Figure 109: Removing An Ipsg M2Pa Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Is the host name From assigned to any inservice Sheet 1 or open associations? Enter the chg-assoc :aname=<association name> Enter the dact-slk command with :open=no:alw=no command these parameters. Repeat this step for all :loc=<location of the signaling link>...

  • Page 848: Removing An Ipsg M3Ua Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing an IPSG M3UA Signaling Link This procedure is used to remove an IPSG M3UA signaling link from the database using the dlt-slk command. The dlt-slk command uses these parameters. :loc –...
  • Page 849 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 LINK LSN SLC TYPE ANAME SLKTPS 2202 A lsnlp1 IPSG assoc2 2205 A lsnip1 IPSG assoc3...
  • Page 850 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway ADAPTER SLKTPS LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM RCONTEXT ASNOTIF m3ua 100% none NUMSLKALW NUMSLKRSTR NUMSLKPROH LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 2207 A IPSG assoc11 Link set table is (22 of 1024) 2% full. The IPSG M3UA signaling link cannot be removed if removing the IPSG M3UA signaling link will cause the number of IS-NR IPSG M3UA signaling links in the linkset to be less than the NUMSLKALW, NUMSLKRSTR, and NUMSLKPROH values shown in the rtrv-ls output.
  • Page 851 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway rept-stat-slk:loc=2207:link=a This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-23 13:06:25 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CLLI 2207,A lsnlp3 ls07clli OOS-MT Unavail ---- ALARM STATUS 0235 REPT-LNK-MGTINH: local inhibited UNAVAIL REASON = LI 8.
  • Page 852 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 11. Verify the changes using the rtrv-slk command, with the card location and link values specified Step 10. For this example, enter this command. rtrv-slk:loc=2207:link=a When the rtrv-slk command has completed, no entry is displayed showing that the signaling link has been removed.
  • Page 853 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-slk command with this parameter. :type=ipsg Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this Do you wish to parameter. remove the IPSG M2PA :loc = <location of the signaling signaling link link being removed>...
  • Page 854 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Place out of service any in-service IP connections on the IPSG M3UA signaling link being removed. Have the far-end node for the signaling link place the M3UA associations in either the ASP-INACTIVE or ASP-DOWN states.

  • Page 855: Figure 110: Removing An Ipsg M3Ua Signaling Link

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Is the signaling Enter the rmv-card command with link the last signaling this parameter. link on the card? :loc=<location of the signaling link> Note: If removing the signaling link will result in 700 or less signaling links in the database and the OAMHCMEAS value in the...

  • Page 856: Removing A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing a Network Appearance This procedure removes the network appearance from the database using the dlt-na command with these parameters. :na – the 32-bit value of the network appearance, from 0 to 4294967295. :type –...

  • Page 857: Figure 111: Removing A Network Appearance

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway These messages should appear; the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP.

  • Page 858: Changing Ipsg Components

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing IPSG Components This section describes how to change the attributes of the following components in the database. Changing an IPLIMx card that contains IPLIMx M2PA signaling links to an IPSG card that contains IPSG M2PA signaling links –...
  • Page 859 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If adding the IPLIMx signaling link will exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS, and the maximum total provisioned system TPS is 500,000, perform the "Activating the HIPR2 High Rate Mode"...
  • Page 860 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway rept-stat-card:loc=1303 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-12-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 43.0.0 CARD VERSION TYPE 1303 133-003-000 ENET IPLIM IS-NR Active ----- ALARM STATUS No Alarms. BLIXP GPL version = 133-003-000 IMT BUS A...
  • Page 861 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 4. Place the card out of service by entering the rmv-card command with the card location shown in the CARD column of the rept-stat-card output Step 2. For this example, enter this command. rmv-card:loc=1303 When the command has successfully completed, this message appears.
  • Page 862 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is (25 of 1024) 2% full. When the chg-card command is executed, the RSVDSLKTPS and MAXSLKTPS values of the linkset will be assigned based on the current IPSG value of the linkset. If the current IPSG value of the linkset is no, the RSVDSLKTPS value of the linkset will be 0 (zero) and the MAXSLKTPS value of the linkset will be 4000.
  • Page 863 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Total provisioned System TPS (103668 of 500000) 21% Command Completed. If the RSVDSLKTPS or the MAXSLKTPS values of each linkset shown in Step 5 will not exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS value shown in the rtrv-tps output, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 864 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipnode1 002-002-002 none 1 off off off no SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- -----------...
  • Page 865 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Step 3 was performed to change the state of the signaling links in the linksets, continue the procedure with Step If IPSG value of the linksets displayed in this step was yes when this procedure was started, Step 4 was not performed to the state of the IPLIMx card, and Step 3...
  • Page 866 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command. Are cards assigned This procedure to the IPLIM or IPLIMI cannot be application shown in the performed. rtrv-card output? Enter the rept-stat-card command The card is not an E5-ENET with this parameter.
  • Page 867 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rmv-card command Is the state with this parameter. From of the card :loc=< the card location of the Sheet 1 OOS-MT-DSBLD? IPLIMx card that is being changed>...
  • Page 868 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Will the card’s What is the From maximum TPS value (5000) be current IPSG value of Sheet 2 exceeded when the chg-card the linkset? command is executed? Change the RSVDSLKTPS value of the linkset, and the MAXSLKTPS value if...

  • Page 869: Figure 112: Changing Iplimx Card To Ipsg Card

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter. From :loc=<the location of the card Sheet 3 specified with the chg-card command> Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. :lsn=<...

  • Page 870: Configuring Ip Options

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Configuring IP Options Use this procedure to change the IP options defined by these parameters: getcomm, setcomm, snmpcont, srkq, trapcomm, ipgwabate, and uameasusedftas. The chg-sg-opts command also contains the sctpcsum parameter. Perform the one of these procedures to change the sctpcsum parameter value.
  • Page 871 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway GETCOMM: public SETCOMM: private TRAPCOMM: public SCTPCSUM: crc32c IPGWABATE: UAMEASUSEDFTAS If the srkq parameter value will not be changed, continue the procedure with Step If the srkq parameter value will be changed, verify the number of routing keys that are currently provisioned by performing Step 2.

  • Page 872: Figure 113: Configuring Ip Options

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on standby MASP to fixed disk complete. Enter the rtrv-sg-opts command Is the srkq Enter the rtrv-tbl-capacity...

  • Page 873: Configuring Ipsg M3Ua Linkset Options

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Configuring IPSG M3UA Linkset Options This procedure is used to configure the options for an IPSG M3UA linkset with the chg-lsopts command and these parameters. :lsn - The name of the IPSG M3UA linkset. :numslkalw - This parameter specifies the number of IS-NR (in-service normal) signaling links in the IPSG M3UA linkset required to change the state of the linkset from the Restricted or Prohibited state to the Allowed state.
  • Page 874 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway THRESH CONFIG/ CONFIG/ PEAK PEAKTIMESTAMP RSVD ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ipgwx1 100% ---- 32000 3700 4000 10-07-19 09:49:19 RCV: 3650 4000 10-07-19 09:49:19 ipgwx2 100% ---- 16000 4800 5000 10-07-19 09:49:09 RCV: 4850 5000...
  • Page 875 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is (13 of 1024) 1% full. IPSG M3UA linksets are shown by the entry m3ua in the ADAPTER column of the rtrv-ls output. If the linkset is an IPSG M3UA linkset, continue the procedure with Step 3 If the linkset is not an IPSG M3UA linkset, perform one of these actions.
  • Page 876 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway RCONTEXT ASNOTIF NUMSLKALW NUMSLKRSTR NUMSLKPROH 1234567890 yes LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 1102 A IPSG ipsgm3ua1102 1202 A IPSG ipsgm3ua1202 1302 A IPSG ipsgm3ua1302 1303 A IPSG ipsgm3ua1303 1305 A IPSG ipsgm3ua1305...

  • Page 877: Figure 114: Configuring Ipsg M3Ua Linkset Options

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any Enter the rept-stat-iptps linksets shown in the This procedure cannot be command. rept-stat-iptps performed. output? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. :lsn=<the name of the linkset shown in the LSN column of the rept-stat-iptps output>...

  • Page 878: Changing An Ipsg M2Pa Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing an IPSG M2PA Linkset This procedure is used to change an IPSG M2PA linkset, a linkset that contains the IPSG value yes and whose ADAPTER value is m2pa, in the EAGLE 5 ISS using the chg-ls commands with these parameters.
  • Page 879 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Number of In-Service Signaling Linkset TPS Signaling Link Fair Share of the Links Linkset TPS 4000 4000 When this threshold is exceeded, a minor alarm (UAM 0116) is generated. When the amount of traffic on the signaling link falls below this threshold, UAM 0116 is automatically cleared and UAM 0119 is generated.
  • Page 880 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Configuring an ITU Linkset with a Secondary Adjacent Point Code (SAPC) The "Configuring a Linkset for the GSM MAP Screening Feature" procedure in the Database Administration Manual - Features. Canceling the RTRV-LS Command Because the rtrv-ls command used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rtrv-ls command can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped.
  • Page 881 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the IPGWAPC value of the linkset is yes or if the IPGWAPC and IPSG values of the linkset are no , the linkset must be removed from the database and then an IPSG M2PA linkset must be added.
  • Page 882 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway LINK LSN SLC TYPE ANAME SLKTPS 1101 A2 lssg1101 IPSG m2pa2 1000 IPTPS for LOC = 1101 is (1000 of 5000) 20% rtrv-slk:loc=1105 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-24 14:02:40 EST 38.0.0 rtrv-slk:loc=1101...
  • Page 883 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The MAXSLKTPS values of some IPSG linksets (and the RSVDSLKTPS values if necessary) have Step to be changed. To perform this action, continue the procedure with Some ATM high-speed signaling links have to be removed. To perform this action, continue the procedure with Step An IPLIMx card that contains signaling links has to be removed.
  • Page 884 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway SLK table is (30 of 1200) 2% full. If IPLIMx cards containing signaling links are shown in the rtrv-slk output, perform the Removing an IPLIMx Card procedure to remove an IPLIMx card and its associated signaling links. If IPLIMx cards containing signaling links are not displayed in the rtrv-slk output, perform one or more of these actions to increase the available TPS.
  • Page 885 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Some ATM high-speed signaling links have to be removed. To perform this action, continue Step the procedure with If you do not wish to perform other actions to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will Step allow the IPSG M2PA linkset to be changed, continue the procedure with 9.
  • Page 886 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway MATELSN IPTPS LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM ---------- 16000 100% LINK SLC TYPE 1111 A SS7IPGW 1112 A SS7IPGW 1201 A SS7IPGW 1202 A SS7IPGW 1203 A SS7IPGW 1204 A SS7IPGW 1205 A SS7IPGW...
  • Page 887 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway TPSALM LSUSEALM SLKUSEALM rsvdslktps 100% 100% LINK SLC TYPE ANAME 1303 A IPSG ipsgm2pa1 1303 A1 IPSG ipsgm2pa2 1303 B1 IPSG ipsgm2pa3 1303 A2 IPSG ipsgm2pa4 1303 A3 IPSG ipsgm2pa5 1307 A...
  • Page 888 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Some ATM high-speed signaling links have to be removed. To perform this action, continue Step the procedure with If you do not wish to perform other actions to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will Step allow the IPSG M2PA linkset to be changed, continue the procedure with 10.
  • Page 889 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS lssg1101 008-012-003 none 1 off off off no SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- -----------...
  • Page 890 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ls command Do you wish Enter the rtrv-ls with this parameter. to change this command. :lsn=<the name of the linkset? linkset> What is the M3UA What is the ADAPTER value of the IPSG value?
  • Page 891 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Enter the rtrv-tps Sheet 1 command. Will the RSVDSLKTPS or the MAXSLKTPS values exceed the Sheet 5 maximum total provisioned system TPS? Note: The maximum total provisioned system TPS cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS.
  • Page 892 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 2 cannot be performed. or 4 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 4 perform? Remove ATM...
  • Page 893 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any linksets shown in From Enter the rept-stat-iptps the rept-stat-iptps Sheet 3 command. output, other than the linkset that is being changed? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter.

  • Page 894: Figure 115: Changing An Ipsg M2Pa Linkset

    Changing an IPSG M2PA Linkset” Procedure in :lsn=<linkset name specified the Database Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway for in the chg-ls command> the procedures that discuss these parameters and their usage. Enter the chg-db:action=backup:dest=fixed command.

  • Page 895: Changing An Ipsg M3Ua Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing an IPSG M3UA Linkset This procedure is used to change an IPSG M3UA linkset, a linkset that contains the IPSG value yes and whose ADAPTER value is m3ua, in the EAGLE 5 ISS using the chg-ls commands with these parameters.

  • Page 896: Table 57: Signaling Link Fair Share Example

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Table 57: Signaling Link Fair Share Example Number of In-Service Signaling Linkset TPS Signaling Link Fair Share of the Links Linkset TPS 4000 1000 4000 1333 4000 2000 4000 4000...
  • Page 897 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway These procedures in the Database Administration Manual - SS7 Adding an SS7 Linkset Changing an SS7 Linkset Configuring an ITU Linkset with a Secondary Adjacent Point Code (SAPC) The "Configuring a Linkset for the GSM MAP Screening Feature"...
  • Page 898 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway rtrv-ls:lsn=lsgw1101 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-20 13:34:40 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS lssg1101 008-012-003 none 1...
  • Page 899 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Removing an IPLIMx Signaling Link After the signaling links have been removed from the linkset, continue the procedure with Step 3 If the IPSG value of the linkset is yes, continue the procedure with one of these steps. If the ADAPTER value of the linkset is M2PA, remove the signaling links from the linkset by performing these procedures as necessary.
  • Page 900 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway CHG-LS: MASP A - COMPLTD 5. The new RSVDSLKTPS value for the linkset cannot allow the sum of the TPS used by all the IPSG signaling links that are assigned to each IPSG card shown in the linkset to exceed 5000 and cannot exceed the maximum total provisioned system TPS.
  • Page 901 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Management to enable and turn on the HIPR2 High Rate Mode feature. When the HIPR2 High Rate Mode feature is enabled and turned on, the maximum total provisioned system TPS is increased to 750,000.
  • Page 902 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If you do not wish to perform other actions to increase the available TPS and the available TPS will Step allow the IPSG M3UA linkset to be changed, continue the procedure with 8.
  • Page 903 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway RCV: 10-07-19 09:49:19 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Command Completed. If linksets are displayed in the rept-stat-iptps output, continue the procedure with Step If linksets are not displayed in the rept-stat-iptps output, perform one or more of these actions to increase the available TPS.
  • Page 904 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-19 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipgwx2 001-001-003 none 1...
  • Page 905 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway L3T SLT GWS GWS GWS APCA (SS7) SCRN SET SET BEI LST LNKS ACT MES DIS SLSCI NIS ipsglsn 003-003-003 none 1 off off off no SPCA CLLI TFATCABMLQ MTPRSE ASL8 ---------------- -----------...
  • Page 906 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Link set table is (8 of 1024) 1% full. Perform these actions as necessary. Perform the Configuring an IPGWx Linkset procedure to change the IPTPS value for any linksets shown in the rtrv-ls output whose IPGWAPC value is yes.
  • Page 907 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-ls:lsn=lssg1101:slktps=500:lsusealm=60:slkusealm=70 chg-ls:lsn=lssg1101:rsvdslktps=500:maxslktps=3000:tpsalmtype=maxslktps :lsusealm=60:slkusealm=70 Note: The rsvdslktps value must be less than or equal to the maxslktps value. When the chg-ls command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-17 16:23:21 GMT EAGLE5 37.5.0 Link set table is ( 13 of 1024)
  • Page 908 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-17 11:43:04 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 LINK LSN SLC TYPE ANAME SLKTPS 1101 A2 lssg1101 IPSG m3ua2 1000 2204 A m3ua1 IPSG m3ua2...
  • Page 909 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 16. Change the existing routing context value by entering the chg-ls command with the rcontext parameter. If the routing context value of the linkset is being changed to a new value, for this example, enter this command.
  • Page 910 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 18. Activate all signaling links that were deactivated in Step 13 using the act-slk command, specifying the card location and link parameter value of each signaling link. For this example, enter this command.
  • Page 911 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-ls command. Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter. Perform the Removing a :lsn=<the name of the What is Linkset Containing SS7 linkset> the IPGWAPC Signaling Links”...
  • Page 912 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Enter the rtrv-tps Sheet 1 command. Note: The maximum total provisioned system TPS cannot be increased beyond 750,000 TPS. The new RSVDSLKTPS value for the linkset cannot allow the sum of the TPS Will the used by all the IPSG signaling links that RSVDSLKTPS or the...
  • Page 913 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway None of the From Actions This procedure Sheets 2 cannot be performed. or 4 Change the TPS of IPGWX or IPSG Which action Linksets do you wish to Sheet 4 perform? Remove ATM...
  • Page 914 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are any linksets shown in From Enter the rept-stat-iptps the rept-stat-iptps Sheet 3 command. output, other than the linkset that is being changed? Enter the rtrv-ls command with this parameter.
  • Page 915 See the Other Optional Parameters” section in the Changing an IPSG M3UA Linkset” Procedure in the Database Administration Manual IP7 Secure Gateway for the procedures that discuss these parameters and their usage. Sheet 5 of 8...
  • Page 916 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway What type IPSG M2PA of linkset was Linkset From selected when this Sheet 5 procedure was started? IPSG M3UA Linkset Do you wish to remove the RCONTEXT value from Sheet 8 the linkset? Are signaling...
  • Page 917 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Are signaling From links assigned to the Sheet 6 linkset? Perform the Removing an IPSG M3UA Signaling Link” procedure to remove all the IPSG M3UA signaling links from the linkset. Enter the chg-ls command with these parameters: :lsn=<the name of the linkset>...

  • Page 918: Figure 116: Changing An Ipsg M3Ua Linkset

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway What type IPSG M2PA of linkset was Linkset From selected when this Sheet 6 procedure was started? IPSG M3UA Was the Linkset Enter the chg-ls command with adapter=m3ua these parameters.

  • Page 919: Changing The Attributes Of An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Attributes of an IPSG Association This procedure is used to change the values of the attributes of an IPSG association, assigned to cards that are running the IPSG application, IPSG cards, using the chg-assoc command and the following parameters.
  • Page 920 The RFC 2960 standard for congestion control is also used. lin – Tekelec's linear retransmission policy where each retransmission timeout value is the same as the initial transmission timeout and only the slow start algorithm is used for congestion control.
  • Page 921 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway interfaces at the remote end while the rhost parameter value with the rhostype=alternate parameter represents an IP address that corresponds to the other network interface at the remote end. :rhostval –...
  • Page 922 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT LINK ADAPTER LPORT RPORT OPEN ALW swbel32 1201 A M3UA 1030 2345 1305 A 1030 2345 1307 A 1030 2346 assoc1 1201 A M3UA 2000 1030...
  • Page 923 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the value of the open parameter value is being changed to yes and the association is not assigned to a signaling link, perform one of these procedures. If the ADAPTER value of the association is M2PA, performAdding an IPSG M2PA Signaling Link.
  • Page 924 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (7 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (800 KB of 6400 KB) on LOC = 1205 rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1201...
  • Page 925 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the new cwmin value is not less than or equal to the bufsize value, either choose another value for the cwmin parameter that is less than or equal to the bufsize value, or performChanging the Buffer Size of an IPSG Association to change the bufsize value so that the bufsize value is greater than or equal to the cwmin value.
  • Page 926 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 M2PA RFC Timers (in msec, T16 in microsec) TSET T1 6000 75000 5000 20000 500 5000 4000 1000...
  • Page 927 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 200000 6000 20000 4000 6000 2000 700 480000 225 250000 140000 30000 30000 500 2250 400 400000 400 8000 50000 100000 50000 60000 500 4500 800 300000 300 7000 300000 20000 2000...
  • Page 928 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway TVALUE : Valid range = 32-bits TIMER 3: UA HeartBeat Period Timer T(beat), time (ms) between sending of BEAT msgs by NE. IPSG, SS7IPGW and IPGWI applications enforce 100(ms)-60000(ms).
  • Page 929 :rport=3000:rtxthr=10000:rhostval=match chg-assoc:aname=assoc1:rport=3000:rtxthr=10000:uaps=3:rhostval=match If an alternate remote host is being specified for the association, for this example enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc2:rhost= gw210.nc-tekelec.com :rhosttype=alternate :rport=3000:rtxthr=10000:rhostval=match Note: The m2patset and ver parameters can be specified only for M2PA associations. If only the alw, open, rtxthr parameter values are being changed in this step, for this example, enter this command.
  • Page 930 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 ANAME assoc2 1205 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST IPNODE2-1205 ALHOST RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST gw210.nc-tekelec.com LPORT 2048 RPORT 2048 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX...
  • Page 931 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (7 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (800 KB of 6400 KB) on LOC = 1205 rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1201...
  • Page 932 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command Perform the "Changing the with this parameter. Attributes of an M2PA Enter the rtrv-assoc :loc = <the location of the card Association" procedure to command.
  • Page 933 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Note: If the adapter parameter value for the Is the rtxthr From association is M3UA, the parameter value being Sheet 1 alw parameter cannot be changed? specified. Enter the chg-assoc with this mandatory parameter: Enter the...
  • Page 934 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the chg-assoc command What is the with these parameters. From value of the open :aname=<name of the Sheet 1 parameter? association being changed> :open=no Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this parameter.
  • Page 935 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-m2pa-tset command with one of these parameters. :ver=d6 – to display the Draft 6 Is the version of the M2PA timer set m2patset parameter From :ver=rfc –...

  • Page 936: Figure 117: Changing The Attributes Of An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Enter the chg-assoc Sheet 4 Was the command with these value of the open parameters. parameter changed :aname=<association on Sheet 3? name being changed> Enter the chg-assoc command with this :open=yes mandatory parameter: :aname=<name of the association being...

  • Page 937: Changing The Buffer Size Of An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Buffer Size of an IPSG Association This procedure is used to change the buffer size of an IPSG association, assigned to E5-ENET cards that are running the IPSG application, IPSG cards, using the chg-assoc command. If you wish to change the buffer size of M2PA associations assigned to cards that are running the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications, perform the Changing the Buffer Size of a M2PA Association...
  • Page 938 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the canc-cmd without the trm parameter at the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered. Enter the canc-cmd:trm=<xx>, where <xx> is the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered, from another terminal other that the terminal where the rtrv-assoc command was entered.
  • Page 939 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the application assigned to the card is SS7IPGW or IPGWI, perform the Changing the Buffer Size of a M3UA or SUA Association procedure. 3. Change the value of the open parameter to no by specifying the chg-assoc command with the open=no parameter.
  • Page 940 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway RTIMES CWMIN 3000 UAPS OPEN RTXTHR RHOSTVAL RELAXED ipsgm3ua1 IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (7 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (400 KB of 6400 KB) on LOC = 1201 5.
  • Page 941 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway This is an example of the possible output. ANAME assoc2 1205 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST IPNODE2-1205 ALHOST RHOST remotehost1 ARHOST LPORT 2048 RPORT 2048 ISTRMS OSTRMS...
  • Page 942 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway e5e6a IP Appl Sock/Assoc table is (7 of 4000) 1% full Assoc Buffer Space Used (700 KB of 6400 KB) on LOC = 1205 rtrv-assoc:aname=assoc1 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 09-05-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 41.0.0 ANAME assoc1 1201...
  • Page 943 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway determine whether or not the cwmin value is less than or equal to the bufsize value, perform one of these actions. Multiply the bufsize value by 1024. Divide the cwmin value by 1024.
  • Page 944 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway chg-assoc:aname=assoc1:bufsize=400 When these commands have successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; If the value of the open parameter was not changed in Step 3, continue the procedure with Step...
  • Page 945 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway ANAME assoc1 1201 IPLNK PORT A LINK ADAPTER M3UA M3UA RFC LHOST m3ua1 ALHOST RHOST remote1 ARHOST LPORT 2000 RPORT 1030 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN 3000...
  • Page 946 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: :loc = <the location of the card containing the association that will be changed, shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...
  • Page 947 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 The new buffer size for this association cannot exceed the available buffer size for the card. Do the buffers If you wish to increase the buffer size on the other associations for this association to a value that is assigned to the card need...
  • Page 948 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Either choose another value for the bufsize parameter that is Is the new bufsize greater than or equal to the value greater than or equal to cwmin value, or change the the cwmin parameter value? cwmin value by performing the...

  • Page 949: Figure 118: Changing The Buffer Size Of An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 3 Do you wish Perform the Changing the to change the LHOST or Host Values of an IPSG ALHOST values of the Association” procedure. IPSG association? Do you wish to Perform the Changing the change the other...

  • Page 950: Changing The Host Values Of An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the Host Values of an IPSG Association This procedure is used to change the host values of an IPSG association, assigned to E5-ENET cards that are running the IPSG application, IPSG cards, using the chg-assoc command. If you wish to change the host values of M2PA associations assigned to cards that are running the IPLIM or IPLIMI applications, perform the Changing the Host Values of a M2PA Association...
  • Page 951 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The EAGLE 5 ISS can contain a maximum of 4000 connections. A maximum of 32 associations can be assigned to an IPSG card. Before the local host value of the IPSG association can be changed, the signaling link that the association is assigned to must be removed by performing one of these procedures.
  • Page 952 This is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 ANAME assoc2 2105 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST IPNODE2-1205 ALHOST M2PA1 RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 2048 RPORT 2048 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN...
  • Page 953 5. Verify that the local host name to be assigned to the association is in the database by entering the rtrv-ip-host:display=all command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-12-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 40.0.0 LOCAL IPADDR LOCAL HOST 192.1.1.10 IPNODE1-1201 192.1.1.12 GW105. NC. TEKELEC. COM 192.1.1.14 IPNODE1-1205 192.1.1.20 IPNODE2-1201 192.1.1.22 IPNODE2-1203 192.1.1.24 IPNODE2-1205 192.1.1.30...
  • Page 954 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 2105 192.1.1.24 255.255.255.0 FULL 2105 192.1.1.54 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 192.1.1.30 255.255.255.0 FULL 2205 --------------- --------------- HALF 2207 192.1.1.32 255.255.255.0 FULL 2207 --------------- --------------- HALF 2213 192.1.1.50 255.255.255.0 FULL 2213 --------------- --------------- HALF...
  • Page 955 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway rtrv-assoc:lhost="IPNODE2-1201" The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 08-04-19 21:17:04 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 CARD IPLNK ANAME PORT LINK ADAPTER LPORT RPORT OPEN ALW swbel32 1201 M3UA 1030...
  • Page 956 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 9. Verify the values of the M2PA timer set you wish to assign to the association by entering the rtrv-m2pa-tset command with the M2PA version (either ver=rfc to display the RFC M2PA timer values or ver=d6 to display the Draft 6 M2PA timer values) of the timer set you wish to assign to the association.
  • Page 957 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 40000 90000 35000 9000 1250 3500 1900 9000 70000 45000 45000 11000 500 1500 1750 900 1000 6000 9000 30000 25000 40000 500 2500 3250 600 5000 5500 75000 15000...
  • Page 958 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 175000 12500 12500 45000 500 1100 2600 1300 7000 1000 5000 1000 1000 1000 200 CAUTION: Changing an M2PA timer set may affect the performance of any associations using the timer set being changed.
  • Page 959 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 0=Broadcast 0=Disabled , 1=Enabled 1=Response Method 0=Disabled , 1=Enabled 2-5=Reserved 6=Broadcast Congestion Status Change 0=Disabled , 1=Enabled 7-31=Reserved PARM 2: ASP/AS Notification options. Each bit is used as an enabled/disabled flag for a particular ASP/AS Notification option.
  • Page 960 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Specifying the lhost parameter only creates a uni-homed endpoint. The network portion of the endpoint's IP address must be the same as the network portion of the IP address assigned to either the A or B network interface of the IP card.
  • Page 961 This is an example of possible output. rlghncxa03w 10-07-28 21:14:37 GMT EAGLE5 42.0.0 ANAME assoc2 2107 IPLNK PORT LINK ADAPTER M2PA M2PA RFC LHOST M2PA2 ALHOST M2PA3 RHOST gw200.nc-tekelec.com ARHOST LPORT 2048 RPORT 2048 ISTRMS OSTRMS BUFSIZE RMODE RMIN RMAX RTIMES CWMIN...
  • Page 962 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway These messages should appear; the active Maintenance and Administration Subsystem Processor (MASP) appears first. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on active MASP. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup on active MASP to fixed disk complete. BACKUP (FIXED) : MASP A - Backup starts on standby MASP.
  • Page 963 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter. Is the IPSG Enter the rtrv-assoc :loc = <the location of the card application is assigned command. containing the association that will be to the card? changed, shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...
  • Page 964 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the From rtrv-ip-host command with Sheet 1 this parameter. :display=all Is the required host From name shown in the Sheet 3 Sheet 3 rtrv-ip-host output? See Note 1. Enter the rtrv-ip-lnk command.
  • Page 965 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command with this From parameter. Sheet 2 :lhost=<local host value shown in the rtrv-ip-host output on Sheet 2> How many The host for IPSG associations associations are can contain a maximum of 32 assigned to the...
  • Page 966 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheets 2 or 3 What is the new M2PA M3UA ADAPTER value of the association? Is the m2patset Is the uaps parameter to be specified parameter to be specified with the chg-assoc with the chg-assoc command?
  • Page 967 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the chg-assoc command with this mandatory parameter: From :aname=<name of the association being changed> Sheets 3 and with at least one of these optional parameters. or 4 :lhost = <local host name from the rtrv-ip-host output>...

  • Page 968: Figure 119: Changing The Host Values Of An Ipsg Association

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Do you wish to Perform the Changing the From change the buffer size Buffer Size of an IPSG Sheets 1 of the IPSG Association” procedure in or 5 association? this chapter.

  • Page 969: Configuring An Ipsg Association For Sctp Retransmission Control

    The RFC 2960 standard for congestion control is also used. lin – Tekelec's linear retransmission mode where each retransmission timeout value is the same as the initial transmission timeout and only the slow start algorithm is used for congestion control.
  • Page 970 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Attributes of an IPSG Association procedure, or in the and chg-assoc command description in the Commands Manual. Canceling the RTRV-ASSOC Command Because the rtrv-assoc command used in this procedure can output information for a long period of time, the rtrv-assoc command can be canceled and the output to the terminal stopped.
  • Page 971 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PING command in progress rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PING GW100. NC. TEKELEC. COM (192.1.1.30): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=0. time=5. ms 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=1. time=9. ms 64 bytes from tekral.nc.tekelec.com (192.1.1.30): icmp_seq=2.
  • Page 972 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway The following is an example of the possible output rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 PASS: Command sent to card rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:15:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 ASSOCRTT: Association round-trip time report (in milliseconds) Retransmission Configuration Retransmission Mode : LIN...
  • Page 973 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.113.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880 My Rwnd = 16384...
  • Page 974 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Configuration State Retransmission Mode = LIN State = OPEN Min. Retransmission Timeout = 10 ULP association id = 18 Max. Retransmission Timeout = 800 Number of nets = 2 Max.
  • Page 975 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway SCTP command complete 8. Perform the Changing the Attributes of an IPSG Association procedure to change the retransmission Step 6 Step parameters of the association based on the results of the outputs of The Weighted Average round-trip time shown in the assocrtt pass command output Step 6, and the data retransmission counts shown in the sctp -a pass command output in...
  • Page 976 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-card command with this parameter: Enter the rtrv-assoc :loc = <the location of the card command containing the M2PA or M 3UA association that is being changed, shown in the rtrv-assoc output>...

  • Page 977: Figure 120: Configuring An Ipsg Association For Sctp Retransmission Control

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the pass:loc=<card location specified with the ping command> :cmd="assocrtt <name of the association specified with the ping command>" From command to display the round trip time data Sheet 1 collected after an association is established when an SCTP INIT message is sent and an...

  • Page 978: Changing The Sctp Checksum Algorithm Option For Ipsg M2Pa Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for IPSG M2PA Associations Use this procedure to change the SCTP checksum algorithm, either Adler-32 or CRC-32c, applied to traffic on SCTP associations. The sctpcsum parameter of the chg-sg-opts command is used to change this option.
  • Page 979 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1. Display the current IP options in the database by entering the rtrv-sg-opts command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 SCTPCSUM: adler32 The rtrv-sg-opts command output contains other fields that are not used by this procedure.
  • Page 980 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the ADAPTER value of the associations shown in the rtrv-assoc output is M3UA, do not perform the remainder of this procedure. Perform the Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for IPSG M3UA Associations procedure to change the SCTP checksum algorithm for IPSG M3UA associations.
  • Page 981 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 09:12:36 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 CHG-ASSOC: MASP A - COMPLTD; 8. Change the value of the open parameter of the associations changed in Step 7 to yes by specifying the chg-assoc command with the open=yes parameter.
  • Page 982 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Last Acked Seq Number = 124669 Maximum Outbound Char Count = 16384 Current Outbound Char Count = 2112 Number Unsent Char Count = 0 Outbound Data Chunk Count = 16 Number Unsent = 0 Number To Retransmit = 0 ip datagrams rcvd = 155402...
  • Page 983 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.112.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880 My Rwnd = 16384...
  • Page 984 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 192.1.1.24 Configuration State Retransmission Mode = LIN State = OPEN Min. Retransmission Timeout = 10000 ULP association id = 18 Max. Retransmission Timeout = 800000 Number of nets = 2 Max.
  • Page 985 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway heartbeat timer count = 244 none left tosend = 0 none left rwnd gate = 5 none left cwnd gate = 8 rlghncxa03w 10-12-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 43.0.0 SCTP command complete rlghncxa03w 08-04-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 38.0.0 Aname...
  • Page 986 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway heartbeat requests rcvd = 135 heartbeat acks rcvd = 52 heartbeat requests sent = 52 ip datagrams sent = 129254 ip datagrams with data chunks sent = 73084 data chunks sent = 396330 retransmit data chunks sent = 135 sacks sent = 64872...
  • Page 987 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Initial Seq Number = 24130 Next Sending Seq Number = 124686 Last Acked Seq Number = 124669 Maximum Outbound Char Count = 16384 Current Outbound Char Count = 2112 Number Unsent Char Count = 0 Outbound Data Chunk Count = 16 Number Unsent = 0...
  • Page 988 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Port 1025 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.112.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880...
  • Page 989 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway If the checksum algorithm shown in all of the associations displayed in this step match the checksum Step 4, continue the procedure with Step algorithm specified in 10.
  • Page 990 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway retransmit data chunks sent...... 4 sacks sent........496302 send failed........0 ip packets received........1816035 ip packets received with data chunk....989957 control chunks (excluding duplicates).... 833141 ordered data chunks (excluding duplicates)..
  • Page 991 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Enter the rtrv-assoc command Enter the rtrv-sg-opts with this parameter. command :loc=<card location of an IPSG card from the rtrv-card output> Enter the rtrv-card command. Record the card locations and signaling link information for all cards running the IPSG application.
  • Page 992 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 1 Enter the chg-assoc command with these parameters: :aname = <aname value from the rtrv-assoc output> :open = no. Repeat this step for each association shown in the rtrv-assoc output.

  • Page 993: Figure 121: Changing The Sctp Checksum Algorithm Option For Ipsg M2Pa Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway From Sheet 2 Enter the rept-stat-slk command with these parameters: Enter the pass:loc=<card location :loc = <location of the card specified in the specified in the rept-stat-slk act-slk command>...

  • Page 994: Changing The Sctp Checksum Algorithm Option For Ipsg M3Ua Associations

    Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Changing the SCTP Checksum Algorithm Option for IPSG M3UA Associations Use this procedure to change the SCTP checksum algorithm, either Adler-32 or CRC-32c, applied to traffic on SCTP associations. The sctpcsum parameter of the chg-sg-opts command is used to change this option.
  • Page 995 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1. Display the current IP options in the database by entering the rtrv-sg-opts command. The following is an example of the possible output. rlghncxa03w 06-10-28 21:16:37 GMT EAGLE5 36.0.0 SCTPCSUM: adler32 The rtrv-sg-opts command output contains other fields that are not used by this procedure.
  • Page 996 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 4. At the IP near end node, stop all traffic to the IP card specified in Step 3 on the EAGLE 5 ISS. 5. At the EAGLE 5 ISS, enter the msucount -l pass command with the card location of the IP card selected in Step 3.
  • Page 997 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway sccp class 4294967295 normalization error 4294967295 sccp called party 4294967295 invalid traffic type 4294967295 sccp calling party 4294967295 M3UA conversion error 4294967295 isup sio 4294967295 SUA conversion error 4294967295 normalization error 4294967295...
  • Page 998 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 11. Change the value of the open parameter of the associations shown in Step 3 to no by specifying the chg-assoc command with the open=no parameter. For this example, enter this command. chg-assoc:aname=assoc3:open=no When this command has successfully completed, this message should appear.
  • Page 999 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway Next Sending Seq Number = 124686 Last Acked Seq Number = 124669 Maximum Outbound Char Count = 16384 Current Outbound Char Count = 2112 Number Unsent Char Count = 0 Outbound Data Chunk Count = 16 Number Unsent = 0 Number To Retransmit = 0...
  • Page 1000 Database Administration Manual - IP7 Secure IPSG M2PA and M3UA Configuration Procedures Gateway 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 IP Address 192.168.112.5 State Reachable Port 7777 Primary 1500 cwnd 16384 ssthresh 16384 Last Net Sent To = 192.168.112.4 Last Net Rcvd From = 192.168.112.4 Over All Eror Count = 0 Peers Rwnd = 13880 My Rwnd = 16384...

This manual is also suitable for:

Eagle

Table of Contents